العاصمة الإدارية- كود المعدات الكهربائية

TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION DESCRIPTION
16050 General Provisions For Electrical Work.
16060 Earthing System.
16120 Wires And Cables.
16130 Raceways, Boxes And Fittings.
16131 Cable Tray.
16132 Cable Trunking.
16140 Wiring Devices.
16150 Miscellaneous Control Equipment.
16170 Safety And Motor Isolators (Disconnects).
16075 Electrical Identification.
16270 Distribution Transformer.
16290 Instruments and Metering.
16320 Distribution Transformer Kiosk.
16330 Primary Medium Voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units.
16430 Low Voltage Switchgear Assemblies Main Distribution Board
16440 Distribution Boards (Power and Lighting Panel Boards).
16490 Air Circuit Breakers.
16491 Miniature Circuit Breakers.
16492 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
16493 Residual Current Devices.
16495 Contactors.
16496 Automatic Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Capacitors
Correction) Assembly.
16500 Lighting.
16950 Testing And Commissioning.
16999 List Of Recommended Manufacturers.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Table Of Contents

Electrical Works
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 16050
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this
section.
B. It’s the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of
the requirements of the above.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General

Conditions and special Conditions and General Requirements apply to the
work of this division.
B. In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements

of Division 1, refer the issue to engineer for direction.
C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract

requirements to the best available standards at the scale required.
D. Light and power and system riser diagrams and schematic diagrams
generally indicate equipment connections to be used for various systems.
Provide system raceway and wiring as required for actual systems installed
on this project. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is
duplicated on the plans.
E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the

contractor shall," "shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all"
have been omitted for brevity.
F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication

and/or description of any item, in the Drawings of Specification or both,
carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item complete with all
appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system,
regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the
indication or description.
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together

for a complete interpretation of the work.
H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate

various items of work. Neither of these have any dimensional significance
Rev.01 August, 2018 General Provisions For Electrical Work

Section 16050
Page 1 of 30
nor do they delineate every item required for the intended installation.
I. Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the
electrical and mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions
indicated on final architectural and structural working drawings and on
equipment shop drawings.
J. Certain details appear on the drawings which are specific with regard to the
dimensioning and positioning of the work. These details are intended only
for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field
coordination for the indicated work.
K. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and

architectural drawings and specifications.
L. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawing and / or between drawings

and other parts of the Contractor Documents or where the interpretation of
either is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the
Owner's authorized representative on such matters before commencing the
Work.
1.3 PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
A. The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such

work and the Contractor shall submit for consultant review and approval
evidence of the suitability and number of his staff who will undertake these
tasks.
B. The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment,

etc., and the Contractor shall allow for any minor modifications to location
that may be necessary.
1.4 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance

testing be carried out by a specialist firm, full details of the capability and
experience of such firm shall be submitted to the consultant for review and
approval
1.5 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS
A. Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials

and equipment proposed for the Work.
B. Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be

purchased from other sources without the prior written agreement of the
consultant.

Section 16050
Page 2 of 30
1.6 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
The contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system

maintenance contract under which the contractor would undertake, is addition to
his obligations under this contract, to fully maintain the system in efficient
working order, including routing checks, adjustments, lubrication and replacement
of consumable spares, etc.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS
2.1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:
EEA - Egyptian Electricity Authority.

IEC - International Electromechanical Commission.
DIN - German Standard Institute.
VDE - Association of German Electrical Engineers.
BS - British Standards.
EN - European Standards.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
NEC - National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
INETA - International Electrical Testing Association.
NESC - National Electrical Safety Code.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
FM - Factory Mutual.
FIA - Factory Insurance Association.
ANSI - American National Standard Institute.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association

“Standard of Installation”

Section 16050
Page 3 of 30
OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
"The work" - That part of the project dependent upon or

subsequent to the statement.
"The works" - The works referred to in the Specification and

which are fully shown and described in the
Contract Documents.
"Directed" - Directed by the Owner's authorized representative
"Inspected" - Inspected by consultant.
"Submitted" or submit - Submitted to or submit to the Owner's authorized

representative
"Specification" - The description of performance requirements,

materials and workmanship contained in the
Contract Documentation.
"IEE Regulations" - The Wiring Regulations for Electrical

Installations within Buildings as issued by the
IEE 16th edition.
2.2 DEFINITION OF "AGREEMENT", ACCEPTANCE" AND “APPROVAL"
"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:
"Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing

"Agreement"
"Accepted" or - Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing

"Acceptance"
"Approved" or - Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing

"Approval"
"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the

following limitation:
i) when given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of

construction submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents shall not be construed as denoting any degree of satisfaction with
the materials used in, or the execution of the Works.
ii) when given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the
contract Documents or proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance
with the design intent and information given in the Contract Documents or
contained in subsequent Instructions.

Section 16050
Page 4 of 30
iii) when given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those
methods are satisfactory.
2.3 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A. The definitions for words and phrased commonly associated with the design,
manufacture and site work for public health, mechanical and electrical
installations shall be those of the IEE Regulations, the IOP, plumbing
Services Design Guide, CIBSE Guides, BS, CP and associated Statutory
Acts.
B. The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents

shall be that used in the IEE Regulations unless specifically identified by
values or descriptions are not covered by such terminology.
C. L.V. shall be taken as meaning "Low voltage", and H.V. shall be taken as
meaning "high voltage" under the IEE Regulations.
D. Any reference to H.V. shall be for voltages in excess of 1000V a.c. or 15V
d.c. between conductors, or 600V a.c. or 900V, d.c. between any conductor
and earth.
E. "Systems" - Includes all necessary equipment, accessories, controls,

racks, suspension me, sheet metal supports, miscellaneous
steel members, etc.
F. "Fixing only" or “fix - Includes the unloading, getting in, unpacking, returning
only" empty cases, wrappings, etc., carriage paid, stacking, safely
storing, protecting, taking from store, handling, hoisting
lowering, fitting, placing in position, fixing and connecting.
G. "Allow" - Means that the cost of the item will be at the sole risk and
expense of the Contractor who is given the opportunity of
inserting such prices in the Bill of Quantities as he considers
relevant including
overheads, profit and establishment charges, as no
subsequent claim for such items will be accepted.
H. "As Necessary" - Means that the work referred to shall be carried out to the
extent and by a method consistent with good practice
I. Words in the documents importing the singular only, also include the plural,
and vice versa where the context requires.
J. Where any possible doubt exists as to the meaning of words or terms used in
the Contract Documents the matter shall be referred by the Contractor to the
Owner's authorized representative for clarification.
2.4 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS
A. All publications referred to shall be the latest edition thereof together with
any amendments current ten days before the date of issue of contract
Section 16050
Page 5 of 30
documents.
2.5 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not

specifically mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or works as may
be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the contract Works in
accordance with accepted current practice or procedure.
B. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and/or between drawings

and other parts of the Contract Documents or where the interpretation of
either is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the
Owner's authorized representative on such matters before commencing the
work.
2.6 SYMBOLS
A. The symbol notation for all drawings to be produced by the Contractor shall
be in accordance with applicable standards and regulations and shall be
agreed by the consultant and shown on a separate drawing.
PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS
3.1 TENDER DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to

enable those tendering to interpret the design for the Works and to submit
competitive Tenders for the execution of the Works.
3.2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered

documents which constitute the Contract Documents.
3.3 TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from
the consultant's drawings, including verifying the accuracy by taking
dimensions on site, in the preparation of any drawings by the Contractor and
before the relevant work proceeds.
3.4 DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS
A. Should any differences exist between the drawings or should there be any
discrepancy in the figures, scale or the respects, the Contractor shall refer the
same to the Owner's authorized representative for clarification before
proceeding with the work.

Section 16050
Page 6 of 30
PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
4.1 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings, based on the Contract Drawings showing details of
the Contractor's proposals for the execution of the Works. The drawings
shall be to such scales, in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to
enable the Work to be installed and shall indicate all pipe layouts, bends, tees
flanges, valves, connections etc., necessary for installation and also
particular installation methods to be applied in certain instances, e.g. where
connecting to existing services. These drawings shall also relate to builder's
work drawings confirming relationships to valve pits, cable intakes .. etc.
B. In respect of drainage drawings, shall take account of the exact location and
type of sanitary ware scheduled by the consultant , and all manholes and
access points shall be shown and dimensioned to take account of walls,
paving and other adjacent permanent work.
C. In respect of fire protection services shall include layouts of sprinkler

installations and details and location of sprinkler heads showing dimensional
co-ordination with false ceiling systems.
D. In respect of gas installations there shall be in addition a "line diagram"

indicating the positions of all gas installation pipes, meters, meter controls,
valves or cocks, pressure test points and electrical bonding, all in accordance
with the "Gas Safety regulations" and gas authority requirements.
E. In respect of electrical installations shall include but not necessarily be
limited to:
i) Site distribution and cable routes.
ii) General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the
Contract.
iii) Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.
iv) Cabling and wiring connections showing cable types, sizes and loads.
v) Trunking and cable tray routes with details of sizes, fixings, cables
carried and terminations.
vi) Conduit routes with conduit sizes, methods of installation and details
of cables, loads and terminations, and all junction and pull-in boxes
vii) Lighting layouts, detailing positions and types of luminaries, switch

positions and wiring connections.

Section 16050
Page 7 of 30
4.2 BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings and Schedules prepared to show requirements for
architectural or structural provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of
the Works and allow their integration into the project.
B. Such drawings should include requirements for foundations, bases, lifting

and supporting structures for plant or equipment, all holes in walls, floors
and ceiling elements, provision of services requirements within voids above
false ceilings or below false floors, the integration of the services
installations into the false ceiling system and trenches, depressions, ducts,
etc., in or through building and site elements.
C. General arrangements and floor plan drawings giving builder's work

requirements shall be to a scale of 1:50.
D. Builder's work drawings for plant rooms shall be to a scale of 1:20.
E. In cases where preliminary builder's work and structural information has

already been given by the consultant such information shall be confirmed
and amplified as required above by the contractor (including confirmation of
weights of items of equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.,) and incorporated
in his drawings.
4.3 SHOP/FABRICATION DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings produced for the purpose of explaining how the
components of the designed works are to be fabricated and assembled.
B. In respect of ductwork, where it may be exist shall be to a scale of not less

than 1:50 and shall indicate the length of each duct section, the internal
dimensions of the bare sheet steel, dimensions of bends and fittings, location
of stiffeners and supports, and shall dimensionally locate the ducts in
relation to the supporting or any adjacent structure. In addition, the location
and size of all equipment, grilles, diffusers, access panels, dampers, fire
dampers, test points, penetrations and associated fittings for automatic
controls and instrumentation, etc., shall be shown.
C. In respect of pre-fabricated piping, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50

and shall indicate tube sizes, pipe length between fittings, location and size
of valves and fittings, anchors, guides, supports and brackets, cleaning eyes
and drain points, etc. Drawings shall relate the location of the pipe to the
supporting and adjacent building structure.
4.4 MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings of any item of plant or equipment produced by a

manufacturer or equipment supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings,
connections and all other relevant details.

Section 16050
Page 8 of 30
B. Where manufactures' original drawings are used they shall be specific to the
relevant Works and all references to optional features, other machines of a
range, etc., shall be or the original drawings redrawn to comply with this
clause.
C. Each drawing shall be stamped CERTIFIED by the Manufacturer which

shall mean that:
i) The drawing represents accurately the item concerned with correct

dimensions all connections precisely located.
ii) The item conforms to the specific description given in the Documents,
quoting the reference numbers from the Contract Document;
iii) The item is shown complete and entire as it will be supplied for the
works and no extraneous or alternative parts are indicated;
D. Individual and layout drawings from electrical component manufacturers

shall include wiring internal and external to panels and controls.
E. All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly that wiring which forms part of or
is connected to the equipment as delivered and shall include the following
minimum information to enable the site connections and wiring to be
completed:
i) maximum electrical loading for each power cable

ii) cable termination facilities
iii) cable identification and all terminal numbers
4.5 CONTROLS DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings and schematics of plant and equipment showing the
control layout with each item uniquely identified, and including a brief
description of controls operation and any associated interlocking.
4.6 SWITCHGEAR DRAWINGS
A. Shall mean the drawings showing the general arrangement, the construction,
the external and internal layout of panels, and wiring diagrams comprising
internal wiring and external wiring diagrams, for the complete systems in the
panels. The drawings shall also indicate all pipe work and capillary
connections from the panels to external equipment.
4.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of black and white prints of
Contract Drawings.

Section 16050
Page 9 of 30
B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on
such prints, at time of occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings.
C. Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural

points.
D. Make drawings available for the Architect’s periodic inspection and submit
for review with As-Built Drawings.
4.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing work, provide complete set of lithotracings of Contract

Drawings on 4 mill mylar or transparencies and upon completion of works
contractor shall submit 2 sets on 3.5” diskettes or tape, computer
reproducible as built drawings of electrical works and prints.
B. Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.
C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop

drawings and provide an accurate and complete record of the work as
installed.
D. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-

Built and referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record
Drawings, to the Architect of acceptance.
PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
5.1 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Prepare and submit before the relevant work proceeds, all drawings
necessary to install the Works. Drawings shall be based on the Contract
Drawings and must be fully coordinated with the architectural works and
other disciplines and shall take into account any modifications either to the
building or the installation which may have taken place, incorporating details
of the actual items of plant and equipment to be installed.
B. Prepare and submit all necessary Schedules of Equipment and devices with
the relevant drawings.
C. The effect of any authorize variation or site instruction shall be carried

through and shown on all applicable drawings by the Contractor. The cost of
so doing shall be reimbursed to the Contractor as part of the cost of the
variation of the instruction.
5.2 SIGNATURE ON CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS
A. Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be signed by the Contractor

to confirm that :

Section 16050
Page 10 of 30
i) The work shown thereon has been coordinated both in sequence of
installation and in physical relationship to the work of others.
ii) The drawing does not contain any variations other than those
authorized by the Owner's authorized representative instruction.
iii) On re-submittal, all alterations made since initial submission have been
clearly annotated on the drawing and listed separately down the right
hand side of the drawing.
PART 6 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
6.1 GENERAL
A. Submit to the Owner's authorized representative to a program agreed with

the Owner's authorized representative comprehensively detailed drawings
showing all builders work required for the Works.
B. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with such information as the

Owner's authorized representative may require on any matter related to or
affecting the Works.
6.2 INFORMATION LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit to the Owner's authorized representative all items of information

required by the Contract Documents at the proper time so as not to impede
the progress of the works.
6.3 INFORMATION FOR MANUALS
A. Where the Contractor sublets the preparation of the Operation and

Maintenance Manual to a specialist firm, the Contractor shall provide or
obtain all necessary information in respect thereof.
6.4 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL LITERATURE
A. Manufacturers' technical literature submitted for examination or for inclusion

in the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be prepared and assembled
specifically for the project and shall exclude any irrelevant matter. Each item
shall be clearly identified on the record Drawings and cross-referenced to
the contract Documents.
6.5 MANUFACTURERS' GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
A. All manufacturers' guarantees and warranties on plant, equipment, etc., shall

be valid at least up to the end of the Defects Liability Period, or for at least
twelve months after Practical Completion of the total project, whichever is
the longer period.

Section 16050
Page 11 of 30
B. All equipment normally guaranteed by the manufacturers for a period of time
which goes beyond the period defined above shall be held to remain under
guarantee for the maximum period.
C. Provide two copies of all such guarantees, one of which shall be included in
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
6.6 PLANT ROOM SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS
A. In addition to the provision of Record Drawings, provide the following at a

size to be easily readable and frame under glass and hang in each plant room
and other appropriate location as directed by the Owner's authorized
representative:
i) Circuit diagrams consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts

showing identification and duties of equipment, numbers and locations,
control and circuits.
ii) Circuit breaker and cable schedules in the form of typewritten sheets
showing the number, type, location, application, service and symbol,
and normal operating position of each protection installed.
iii) Control schematics.
iv) Mechanical and electrical plant items:
v) First aid instructions for treatment of persons after electric shock.
vi) All other items required under Statutory or other regulations.
vii) Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for

emergency call-out service applicable to any system or item of plant.
PART 7 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals (which shall incorporate

Instruction Manuals on detailed requirements) covering and including the
information detailed below:
7.1 SCOPE OF SYSTEMS
i) A full technical description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure

that the Owner's staff fully understand the scope and facilities provided.
ii) A technical description of the mode of operation of all systems.
7.2 INSTALLATION RECORD
i) A photo reduction of all Record Drawings to A1 size together with an index.

Section 16050
Page 12 of 30
ii) Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating principal items of plant,
equipment, valves, etc.
iii) Legend for all color-coded services.
iv) Schedules of plant, equipment, valves, etc., by system, stating their locations
within the building, duties and performance figures, together with anticipated
life exp.
v) A unique code for each item of plant, equipment, valves, etc., installed
number cross-referenced to the rend diagrammatic drawings and Schedules.
The name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer of every item
of equipment and plant shall be listed together with catalogue list numbers.
vi) Manufacturers' literature including detailed drawings, electrical circuit

details, and printed operating and maintenance instructions for all items of
plant and equipment sunder this contract.
vii) A copy of all test certificates including those for all plant, equipment, valves,
etc., used in the installations, including (but not limited to) electrical circuit
tests, corrosion testes, type testes, works tests, start-up and commissioning
tests, including those for air and water balancing.
viii) A copy of all manufacturers' guarantees.
7.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
i) Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and
systems installed.
ii) Control sequences for all systems installed.
iii) Scheduled details of all equipment settings, and actual values maintained in
controlled variables during commissioning.
iv) Procedures for seasonal changeovers.
7.4 NUMBER OF COPIES REQUIRED
A. Provide the Owner's authorized representative with one original and three
copies of the final Operation and Maintenance Manual.
7.5 PREPARATION OF MANUALS
A. The manuals shall be contained in A4 size, plastic-covered, lose leaf, four

ring binders with stiff covers, each indexed, divided and appropriately cover-
titled. Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the
binder so that they may be unfolded without being in any detached from the
rings.

Section 16050
Page 13 of 30
B. Prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in draft as soon as the
Installation Drawings are in hand.
C. Make two sets of temporary manuals (with provisional Record Drawings and
preliminary performance data) available at commencement of
commissioning to enable Owner's staff to familiarize themselves with the
installation.
These should be of the same format as the final manuals with temporary
insertions for items which cannot be finalized until the works are
commissioned and performance tested.
7.6 OBLIGATIONS OF MANUFACTURERS TO PROVIDE LITERATURE
A. The requirements and obligations of manufacturers to provide literature as

part of the installation record shall form part of plant and equipment orders
and such orders shall be considered unfulfilled until literature requirements
have been met.
PART 8 - INSPECTION, TEST AND APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
8.1 GENERAL
A. Submit Inspection, Test and Approval Certificates as required by the contract

Documents.
PART 9 - PROVISION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
9.1 DRAWING PRODUCTION
A. Prepare and submit a master plan for drawing production covering the
following:
i) list of drawings to be produced

ii) drawing/Schedule titles and numbers
iii) symbols/notation/scales to be used
iv) cross-references to other drawings
v) identification of drawings required for record purposes.
9.2 CHECKING PRIOR TO SUBMISSION
A. All drawings, Schedules and other information provided by manufacturers,

suppliers, or approved sub-contractors shall be checked by the contractor
who shall ensure that all requirements of the Contractor who shall ensure that
all requirements of the Contract documents have been incorporated prior to
submission.

Section 16050
Page 14 of 30
9.3 PREPARATION OF RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the

installation of the Works as each section is completed. The Owner's authorized
representative and the consultant shall be allowed to inspect these drawings on
request during their preparation and each drawing shall be submitted to the
Owner's authorized representative prior to Practical Completion.
9.4 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The final draft of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted
in due time, and in any case not less than four weeks prior to Practical
Completion, so that at least one copy of the complete final version is in the
possession of the Owner at Practical Completion.
B. the Operation and Maintenance Manual is an essential part of the works. The
works will not be accepted as complete and payment will be withheld until
the required number of copies of the complete final document have been
received by the Owner's Authorized representative.
C. If partial possession is required by the Owner then the documentation shall

also be phased accordingly and so arranged to finally form one
comprehensive document.
D. It shall be the contractor's responsibility, whenever a successive phase of the

works is handed over, to amend and update the previously issued version of
the Operation and Maintenance Manual, bring it to the appropriate stage of
completion and submit same to the Owner's Authorized representative in due
time.
9.5 FAILURE TO PRODUCE RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A. If the contractor fails to produce and submit the record drawings as required
during the progress of the works, or other information for the operation and
Maintenance Manual by the due dates.
Then the Owner's Authorized representative may instruct a third party to

provide any or all of these documents and the total cost of preparing such
documents shall be borne by the contractor.
PART 10 - STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS AND OTHER AUTHORITIES
10.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor will be responsible for programming, coordinating and

progressing the involvement of the Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities in the works.
B. Provide all necessary information so required by the Owner's Authorized

Section 16050
Page 15 of 30
representative in respect of the Statuary Undertakings and other Authorities
related to the works.
C. In addition, the contractor shall execute the following in connection with the
applicable statutory Undertaken and other Authorities.
10.2 COMPLETION OF NEGOTIATIONS
A. Take responsibility for and complete negotiations commenced by the

Owner's Authorized Representative or the Owner in respect of the provision
or diversion of utility services.
10.3 APPLICATIONS BY OWNER
A. Take responsibility for and complete any application made by the Owner in
respect of any matter related to the works.
10.4 SAMPLES
A. Provide and submit prior to placing orders samples of workmanship for

testing by the applicable statutory undertaking or other authority.
10.5 CONNECTIONS OF NEW WORKS
A. Make arrangements to allow connection of the new works to the supply

networks including providing details of the proposed works and obtaining
approval as necessary.
10.6 BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. Examine and check the contract Documents for compliance with the Statutory
Requirements so that written notice of any divergence the contractor may find
between the contract Documents and the Statuary Requirements, can be
issued to the Owner's Authorized representative by the contractor in due time
so as not to delay the progress of the works.
Where Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities require to witness tests,

the contractor shall give all necessary notice, carry out such tests, provide
attendance and facilities and copy any documents, etc., as required.
10.7 NOTICES AND FEES
A. Give all notices in accordance with BY-Laws and regulations and pay all
fees and charges legally demandable. Provisional Sums are included in the
Bill of Quantities for fees and charges payable to Statutory Undertakings and
other Authorities.

Section 16050
Page 16 of 30
10.8 BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION
A. Obtain details of any builders work required, and provide the Owner's
Authorized representative with all necessary details of same.
10.9 AMENDMENTS
A. Details of any amendments to the works deemed necessary by a Statutory

Undertaking or other Authority shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized
representative prior to work being executed.
10.10 FORMALITIES
A. Comply with all formalities in connection with test notices, agreements,

application for supply forms, etc., and forward all such documents requiring
the Owner's signature to the Owner's Authorized representative in ample
time.
B. Prepare installation Drawings for sprinkler system, fire main, pumps, alarms,
fire prevention systems and the like, together with related calculations and
technical information in a suitable form and submit same to the local
Authorities and Fire Insurers as required by the Owner's Authorized
representative.
10.11 CORRESPONDENCE, ETC.
A. Provide copies of all correspondence, test certificates, notices, etc.
10.12 COST OF RE-CONNECTIONS, ETC.
A. The contractor shall be responsible for any cost changes for re-connections,
re-visits, re-, etc., except for such charges arising from any direction of the
Owner's Authorized representative arising from any direction in respect of
defective work.
10.13 GENERAL FACILITIES
A. Arrange for facilities to be provided for the purpose of laying new mains and
services and adjusting existing equipment.
B. Notify the owner's Authorized representative that the work of the Statutory
Undertakings and other Authorities is complete in order that the owner's
Authorized representative can issue directions in respect of covering up of
the permanent works by other contractors.

Section 16050
Page 17 of 30
PART 11 - CONTROL OF QUALITY
11.1 SPECIFIED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Unless otherwise specified all materials, plant and equipment, and the use
and installation thereof, shall comply with the material, test and other
requirements of the relevant. IEE wiring regulations 16th edition, IEC
standards and BS standard.
B. Materials or substances which are generally known at the time of use to be

deleterious shall not be used other than as allowed by standards or statutory
regulation current at the time of use
C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality, and shall be produced by skilled

and responsible craftsmen fully experience and in their respective trades.
D. Allow for proper packing and safe delivery of all equipment and materials
and for returning re-usable packaging to the suppliers as appropriate
E. Include for obtaining materials from any source whatsoever to complete the
works within the contract period and no claim will be allowed for materials
ex-stock or from any other source in the event of difficulty of supply.
F. Identical parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable and any items,

fittings or accessories which are used in quantity shall in each case be the
produce of one manufacturer.
11.2 GUARANTEE AVAILABILITY OF SPARES
A. Guarantee or provide manufacturers' written guarantees that spares will be

available for a minimum period of ten years from the date of practical
completion both to the Owner and to any other future building Owner,
occupier or contractor having responsibility for the maintenance of the
works.
11.3 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FIXING
A. All installation materials, component parts or complete items of equipment

shall be delivered and stored on site in properly labeled boxes, crates or
containers, suitably designed and constructed to give protection against
transportation and handling damage and deterioration during storage. The
packing shall be weather-proof.
B. Store all materials on raised boarded platforms under weather-proof cover

and store pipes, conduits, Trunking and the like on racking.
C. Equipment or component parts of equipment specifically designed to operate

in normal room conditions, shall be delivered to and stored on site with
suitable waterproof protection.

Section 16050
Page 18 of 30
D. Take particular care to protect component parts specifically designed to act
as heat transfer surfaces. These surfaces shall have purpose-designed packing
to protect them whilst in transit and storage on site.
E. Completely cover valve ports and ends of pipes or plug to prevent the ingress
of foreign matter, and additionally protect flanges against damage to the
flange surface.
F. Examine all materials and equipment supplied under this contract on delivery
to site and immediately prior to installation. Any material or equipment
which is damaged or faulty shall be replaced.
11.4 SETTING OUT
A. The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the
works and for the correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignment
for all parts of the works and for the provision of all necessary instruments,
appliances and labor in connection therewith. If any error shall appear or
arise in the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the works
the setting out for which the contractor was responsible, the contractor shall
at his own expense rectify such error.
B. The checking of any setting out or of any line or level by the Owner's
authorized representative shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness thereof. The contractor shall carefully
protection preserve all bench-marks, sight rails, pegs and other things used in
setting out the works.
C. Take all necessary dimensions on site, check runs and levels and mark out
for builder's work.
D. Any unnecessary work carried out by the Owner's authorized representative

or other contractor due to inaccuracy of the contractor's drawings,
dimensions, or marking out shall be paid for by the contractor.
11.5 PROTECTION OF NEW WORK
A. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that all his work is
adequately protected. Protection shall be by the contractor at the completion
of each day and during periods of inclement weather, and all work exposed
to view on completion in the works shall be protected from spillage, stains
and other damage. All systems shall be kept in a fully drained condition prior
to commissioning.
B. Test water shall be disposed of so as not to damage any part of the temporary
or permanent works, or any adjoining land or property.

Section 16050
Page 19 of 30
11.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING GENERALLY
A. Agree procedures for notices, witnessing, reporting and recording tests with
all parties involved including local authorities and statutory undertakings,
prior to the commencement of the works.
B. Submit copies of the formal test certificates signed by the contractor's

representative not later than seven days after completion of successful tests.
11.7 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Re-test or carry out at no extra cost any additional tests required to establish
acceptability of the works following failure of any part thereof or any item
therein to meet the required standard or functional performance.
11.8 INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
A. Supply, check, re-calibrates whenever necessary and maintain in good

working order all instruments and equipment for setting out, measurements,
gauging, inspection, commissioning and performance testing whether they
are specifically called for or implied by the contract documents.
B. All such instruments and equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and
shall satisfy the purposes and accuracy’s required by the contract documents.
C. All instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the contractor.
11.9 PROVISION OF STAFF
A. Provide all necessary staff with the relevant skills and competence for all
inspection, testing, commissioning and performance testing.
PART 12 - INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING
12.1 GENERAL
A. Provide assistance and make available to the consultant and Owner's

authorized representative any instruments or other equipment he may require
from time to time for examining the accuracy, quality and performance of
the contract works.
PART 13 - INSPECTION AND TESTING CERTIFICATES
13.1 PROCEDURES
A. Schedule and submit an integrated program in respect of those elements of

the works for which inspections and tests shall be carried out and for which
inspection and test records shall be maintained.

Section 16050
Page 20 of 30
These elements shall include in particular those which will be covered up
during construction, and other matters described under certificates for
materials and equipment.
B. Testing of individual items of plant and equipment at manufacturers' works

shall be witnessed and approved by Owner's consultant. On site, and final
testing of completed installations or parts of installations shall all be in
accordance with the contract documents.
13.2 CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the

appropriate British Standard or as described. Should the contractor propose
an alternative item without the appropriate certification, independent testing
shall be carried out at the contractor's expense to determine compliance with
the contract documents.
B. Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the
manufacturer's name, brand name and any other data that may be required to
verify their exact nature and relate it to the requirement of the contract
documents.
13.3 WORKS TESTS CERTIFICATES
A. Works tests certificates shall include, whenever applicable, full information

to enable the item tested to be identified, such as project title, contractor's
name, manufacturer's nameplate or serial numbers, the location in the works
and the delivery or batch which the sample represents.
13.4 INSPECTION, AND TESTING RECORDS
A. Maintain records of all inspections, and testing performed to substantiate

conformity with the contract documents including those carried out by the
contractor and/or third party testing agencies, together with manufacturers' or
suppliers' certificates of test.
B. All records shall be retained on site and made available to the Owner's
authorized representative on request. On completion of the works all records
shall be handed over to the Owner's authorized representative unless
otherwise directed.
C. These records shall include, as appropriate, but not be limited to, project title,
contractor's name, the identification of the element, item, batch or lot, the
nature and number of the observations and tests, the dates of testing, the
name and signature of the person responsible for the testing, the number and
type of deficiencies found, and details of any corrective action taken.
D. Any record which indicates that any part of the works inspected or tested
does not comply with the contract documents shall be submitted without

Section 16050
Page 21 of 30
delay in order that the contractor's proposals for rectification may be
assessed.
13.5 MATERIALS AND SAMPLES
A. Each manufacturer must be willing to admit the Owner's authorized

representative and the consultant to his premises during normal working
hours for the purpose of examining and witnessing the testing of materials
and equipment proposed for the works.
B. All materials and equipment shall be new.
C. Obtain and implement manufacturers' instructions on the assembly and

installation of materials and equipment.
D. Submit all samples required by the contract documents.
E. The procedure for submission of samples shall be agreed prior to

commencement of the works.
F. Samples of materials, workmanship, components and equipment accepted as

complying with the contract documents will be retained by the consultant
and all related items included in the works shall be at least equal in all
respects to these samples.
Provide safe storage of accepted samples on site including racks for display,
reference and inspection.
13.6 REJECTION OF MATERIALS OR WORKS NOT TO STANDARD

OFSAMPLES
A. Any material or work which is inferior to an accepted sample or is different

from parts of the works already constructed or which is stained or damaged
after installation will be treated as defective work.
13.7 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Defective work, and the opening up of the works to ascertain same, shall be
dealt with strictly in accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in
the contract document.
B. Replace defective work with materials, goods or work in accordance with the
contract documents. Alternatively submit proposals for any treatment or
making good that is considered will bring the defective work to the standard
required by the contract documents. Such proposals shall not relieve the
contractor of his responsibility to execute the works to the full intent of the
contract documents.
C. The costs as defined in the contract conditions shall include the cost of any
related delay or disruption in the progress of the works, or any other

Section 16050
Page 22 of 30
consequential cost.
13.8 DAMAGE BY INCLEMENT WEATHER
A. The contractor shall not execute any work when it is likely to be adversely
affected by inclement weather and he shall make good any damage so caused
at his own expense.
PART 14 - COMMISSIONING THE WORKS
A. All pre-commissioning checks, setting to work, commissioning and

performance testing shall be carried out as detailed elsewhere in the contract
documents.
14.1 ATTENDANCE AND CO-OPERATION
A. give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of

requirements for the attendance and co-operation by the Owner's authorized
representative and by other contractors.
14.2 NOTICE TO CONSULTANT
A. Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of

any commissioning or testing to be carried out to enable the consultant to
witness all or any of such tests, etc.
14.3 UNSUCCESSFUL TESTS
A. The contractor shall pay any costs incurred by the Owner, Owner's
authorized representative or the consultant in connection with unsuccessful
tests, including costs incurred due to the inability of the contractor to make
or complete a test, having given the notice required above.
14.4 CHECKING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning includes the setting to work and regulation of the

installation.
B. Check all installations and commission in accordance with the contract

documents including but not limited to the following :
i. Co-operation with the Owner's authorized representative to produce a

coordinated program for the testing and commissioning of the
complete works.
ii. Provision of all consumable materials.
iii. Provision of such temporary communication apparatus as is necessary

to enable members of the commissioning team who are unable to be in

Section 16050
Page 23 of 30
visual or aural contact with each other to carry out their tasks safely
and effectively. Such apparatus shall not cause interference with
equipment owned or operated by any other parties.
iv. Provision of proper and permanent records of relevant readings of all

quantities taken during the checking, pre-commissioning and
commissioning procedures.
The form of the records shall be agreed with the Owner's authorized
representative in advance of commissioning and the record for each
complete commissioning procedure shall be dated and signed by the
person whom the contractor has appointed to be formally in charge of
commissioning.
14.5 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. When the Contractor has completed the commissioning of the whole of

works he shall give to the Owner's authorized representative written
certification of this fact. The certificate shall be signed by the director or
manager responsible for the contract.
B. Only when this written certification has been received by the Owner's
authorized representative will performance tests be allowed to commence.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner's authorized representative in writing,
where engineering systems involve the works of more than one works
contractor, performance tests will only be allowed to commence when
written certification from all the relevant works contractors has been
received.
C. Carry out during this period full tests on the complete works to demonstrate
that the works meet the requirements of the contract documents.
D. The Owner's authorized representative may at his discretion waive any part
of the full test procedure if he considers it has been satisfactorily
demonstrated, recorded and properly certified at any earlier time but the
contractor shall however allow in his costs for carrying out all of the
provisions in this clause.
14.6 RECORDS OF WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Keep a daily record throughout the contract period of the maximum,

minimum and average outside shade temperature, humidity and wind speed.
14.7 SUMMER AND WINTER PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Test the performance of the whole of the works in both summer and winter
design conditions and allow for any special visits to site and provide any
necessary attendant during the defects liability period to set up, monitor and
remove test and recording equipment.

Section 16050
Page 24 of 30
14.8 SYSTEMS USED BEFORE PRACTICAL COMPLETION
A. No part of the permanent services installations shall be used by the cofor his
own benefit without the written agreement of the Owner's authorized
representative.
B. Should any part of the works be operated during the period of the contract
for the benefit of the contractor and/or the Owner's authorized representative,
all consumable spares, including light bulbs and tubes which have been so
put to use shall be replaced by new not more than seven days prior to
practical completion.
14.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY
A. Defects, s’s or other faults appearing at any time during the defects liability
period which have led, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are likely to lead to
failure or malfunction of any part of the works shall be made good
immediately upon receipt of any instruction or direction of the Owner's
authorized representative.
B. Prepare and submit a record of any failure or malfunction of any part of the
works, the remedial action taken, subsequent re-testing and the results
thereof.
C. Notify the Owner's authorized representative of any malfunction in, or

damage to, the works which the contractor can demonstrate had been caused
by incorrect operation of the system, vandalism or action of a third party.
D. Inform the Owner's authorized representative in writing when all defects are
finally rectified so that an inspection may be carried out prior to the issue of
the final certificate.
PART 15 - PREVENTION OF NUISANCE AND DANGER TO PERSONS
15.1 SITE SAFETY GENERALLY
A. The contractor before commencing work shall inform the, Owner's

authorized representative of the person who will be on site during working
hours and who will have the authority to take action on and be responsible
for all aspects of safety, health and welfare in connection with the contract
works.
B. Take all the necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all site personnel,
and the general public, and in respect of the contract works provide for the
safety, health and welfare of work-people employed on the site to comply
with the requirements of the following and of all other relevant statutes,
statutory instruments, statutory regulations or industrial agreements.

Section 16050
Page 25 of 30
15.2 FIRE PRECAUTIONS
A. Take all reasonable precautions to avoid the outbreak of fire, particularly in

work involving the use of naked flames and impress on workmen the dangers
involved in the careless disposal of matches and cigarettes, etc., and the
accumulation of rubbish on site. Where considered necessary due to the
nature of the works or as directed by the Owner's authorized representative,
institute a "No smoking" regime.
B. The use of naked lights shall be prohibited except in cases of absolute

necessity, and extreme care taken in the use of all equipment likely to cause
fire damage.
15.3 NOISE AND NUISANCE CONTROL
A. Conduct operations in such a manner that nuisance shall not be caused to the
general public, adjoining residents and users of adjacent buildings.
If such nuisance is being caused the contractor shall immediately make such
arrangements as will prevent a recurrence of the same and indemnify the
Owner against any claims arising there from.
B. Attention is also drawn to the necessity to comply with BS 5225 Code or

Practice for noise control on construction and demolition sites.
15.4 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Comply with local regulations and satisfy the requirements of the

environmental health office under whose authority the works are being
executed.
15.5 USE OF LASER EQUIPMENT
A. The following safety precautions shall be observed in addition to the

recommendations of BS 4803.
i. At least one warning notice at each laser location.
ii. The laser should be turned off or shuttered when not in use or
unattended.
iii. The laser should be set well above or below the heads of employees
when possible.
iv. Employees should never stare directly into the laser beam or point the
laser at another person.
v. all laser equipment must bear a label indicating the maximum beam
output, which must not exceed 5 milli watts.

Section 16050
Page 26 of 30
vi. Only qualified employees shall be assigned to install, adjust and
operate the laser equipment.
B. In addition, the maximum period of exposure (MPE) to laser light should be

determined and monitored in accordance with BS 4803
PART 16 - EXISTING SITE SERVICES
A. Co-ordinate and co-operate with the Owner's authorized representative in the

location, protection and any necessary temporary diversion of existing site
services.
B. Make a dimensioned sketch describing the exposed service and locating it in

plan and section to permanent and accessible reference points date and sign
the sketch and submit same to the Owner's authorized representative.
C. Any service so exposed shall only be covered up by permanent works with

the written consent of the Owner's authorized representative.
PART 17 - EXISTING TREES AND PLANTS
A. Carefully protect and maintain all trees, hedges, shrubs, etc., in proximity to
the works and which are to be retained in the permanent works.
PART 18 - INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S STAFF IN OPERATION OF

SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PRACTICAL
COMPLETION
A. Prior to practical completion of the installation, the Owner will be appointing

maintenance staff or maintenance contractor to undertake the operation and
maintenance of the building services installation.
The contractor shall include for providing assistance to the Owner's staff
during the course of the installation to explain the purpose and function of
the works.
B. Include for a minimum period of 25 plant operating days prior to practical

completion, to instruct the Owner's maintenance staff or maintenance
contractor in the day to day running of the plant and systems. The location
and function of all items listed on the record schedules shall be explained
and the procedures given in the operating and maintenance manuals for
starting up, shutting down, isolating sections, emergency procedures, etc.,
shall be comprehensively explained and demonstrated to the Owner's
satisfaction.
PART 19 - FUEL AND POWER FOR COMMISSIONING
A. Fuel and power for commissioning and performance testing the works

Section 16050
Page 27 of 30
including payment of statutory undertakings for same.
B. Fuel, water and power for running the contract heating system to dry out the
building including payment of statutory undertakings for same.
PART 20 - ATTENDANCE UPON OTHERS
A. Attendance upon and co-ordination of other contractors as necessary for the

commissioning and performance testing of the contract work.
PART 21 - TEMPORARY WORKS
A. All temporary works required for the proper and safe construction of the
permanent works and for the protection of personnel on site.
B. Advise the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant of all

temporary works required to be carried out together with all details of work
required to uphold existing services and intended temporary connections
thereto.
PART 22 - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES
A. All necessary notifications and authorizations in respect of connection of

temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator
opening up thereof.
B. No temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator

opening up thereof shall be carried out without prior notification to the
Owner's authorized representative and any necessary authorization obtained
from the Owner's authorized representative.
PART 23 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. The contractor shall provide and maintain in full working order all necessary
safety equipment for access and inspection purposes for use by the contractor
and for use by other personnel on site as instructed by the Owner's
authorized representative. Such equipment shall include, but not be limited
to, protective clothing, safety harness, gas detection and emergency
breathing apparatus for inspection of confined spaces.
B. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with EEA (Egyptian Electricity

Authority) and submit all necessary documents of the electrical equipment that
will affect the EEA networks such as transformer, HV switchgears, ring main
units, LV switchboards,…etc for their review, full coordination, matching,
satisfaction to the EEA electrical networks and then finally gather approval.

Section 16050
Page 28 of 30
PART 24 - SCOPE OF WORKS
24.1 THE CONTRACT WORKS
A. The works covered by this contract are the design, selection, manufacturing,
works testing, supplying delivery to site, erecting, connecting up, testing,
commissioning, performance testing and handing over in working order the
complete engineering services installations described in the contract
document.
24.2 SYSTEMS INCLUDED
1. Medium voltage switchgears & Ring Main units.

2. Transformers.
3. Low voltage switchgear & distribution boards/boxes.
4. Street Lighting installation.
5. Lighting installation for indoor.
6. Cables (M.V/L.V).
7. Earthing.
8. Concrete foundation for poles and distribution boxes.
PART 25 - RELATED WORK
There will be other Contract Works associated with and related to this Contract.
The contractor is responsible for getting approval from Electricity Authority for
risers and distribution.
The Contractor shall make himself fully aware of the interfaces between and the
requirements of his Works and the works of other.
PART 26 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Contractor shall be responsible to proceed with all necessary HV test required

by EEA (Egyptian Electricity Authority) for transformers, HV switchgears,
ring main units, …etc. the HV test shall be coordinated and done by EEA
testing department and all costs will be paid by the contractor.
B. The contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the equipment and

systems under this Contract function and operate in full accordance with the
Specification and the testing and commissioning procedures described
elsewhere in this Specification.
C. Once the Contractor has demonstrated the operation of the Works to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative the complete
integration of the Contractors Works with the Works of others will be the
responsibility of others.
D. Not withstanding this, the Contractor's Works will not be deemed complete

Section 16050
Page 29 of 30
until the works are fully integrated and demonstrated in function and
operation as being fully integrated with the associated works by others.
E. The Contractor shall allow for full attendance to the Owner's Authorized
Representative and others in order that the whole of the Works under this
contract can be successfully demonstrated to be functioning and operating
with all other associated works to the satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
F. This shall not relieve the contractor in any way of his responsibilities under
the Contract.
END OF SECTION 16050

Section 16050
Page 30 of 30
SECTION 16060
SUBSTATION EARTHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this
section.
C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical earthing work specified

elsewhere in these specifications.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all substation
earthing work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required
for a complete system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

earthing products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary materials,
including stranded cable, copper braid and bus and bonding jumpers whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL and IEEE Standards pertaining to electrical earthing
circuitry and equipment. Provide earthing products which are labeled for their
intended usage.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on earthing products and associated

accessories.
B. Samples : Submit sample of earthing cables and earthing accessories.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Substation Earthing

Section 16060
Page 1 of 5
C. Shop drawings : Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRODES
A. Earth rods shall be of circular cross-section copper bond type Sections shall be
jointed with purpose made couplings and a suitable driving cap and tip shall be
fitted to the rod extremities. Couplings shall not exceed the diameter of the rod.
B. Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other material
which exhibits mechanical strength, electrical continuity between sections and
does not give rise to electrolytic or corrosive action. All coupling units shall be
the same length of threaded length of the rod.
C. Earth rods shall be a minimum length of 3 meters and shall be driven into the
ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. The tops of the rods shall be
driven below ground level to suit the inspection pit.
D. The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made concrete pit to
facilitate inspection. The pit shall be provided with a lid and the assembly shall
be flush with ground level.
E. All copper cables shall be connected 120 mm from the top of the earth rod with
a purpose made of thermo weld.
F. Parallel connected earth rods shall be spaced at a horizontal distance equal to

their buried length. They shall be connected with bare 120 mm² stranded
copper cable unless otherwise shown on the drawings, buried not less than 400
mm below ground level.
G. Copper stranded cable may be installed in the same trenches as LV cables but
shall be separated from all other cables and services by a distance not less than
300 mm.
H. The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed five ohm. Site
testes shall be made to ascertain that the electrode system resistance meets this
requirement. If the resistance exceeds this figure the contractor shall submit his
proposals to reduce the system resistance to the specified level.
2.2 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
A. Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and electrode
system shall be green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper cable. A

Section 16060
Page 2 of 5
minimum of two earthing conductors shall be installed and separately connected
to the main earth bar with bolted test links of copper and having a cross section
equal to the main earth bar.
2.3 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL
A. The main earthing terminal shall consist of hard drawn copper to IEC,
DIN/VDE Standards BS 1432 formed into a bar having minimum dimensions
as detailed in the earthing schematic.
B. Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the finished
floor level and spaced by means of insulators not less than 50 mm from the
fixing surface.
C. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar width.
Where this is not possible then the connection shall be made to a copper flag
welded to the earthing bar.
D. Each connection to the main earthing terminal shall be identified with an

appropriately worded label made of durable material.
2.4 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A. Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars and the

main earthing terminal or bar shall be made with 120 mm² stranded copper
insulated cables unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Cables shall be
connected to remote ends of the equipment earthing terminals or bar and
separately connected to the main earthing terminal or bar.
B. Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these shall be
green/yellow PVC covered and installed on a galvanized cable tray and fixed
with purpose made cleats.
C. Connections between main earthing terminal or bars, equipment earthing

terminals, etc, and stranded copper cables shall be made with appropriate
compression type lug, bolt, nut and lock washers. Contact surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and tinned.
D. Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or other items
which come into direct contact with copper protective conductors bars, strips,
cables etc, shall be non-ferrous and manufactured from brass, bronze or other
suitable conducting material which will not cause electrolytic or other
corrosion. Where connections occur between copper and galvanized structures,
contact surfaces shall, additionally, be tinned and after completion compounded

Section 16060
Page 3 of 5
to exclude moisture. Protective conductors, cables, strip, bars, lugs, etc, shall be
installed in visible and serviceable positions.
The joints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of
at least 600 oC. The amount of overlap between the two strips to be jointed shall
not be less than the width of the larger conductor.
2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

As per recommended manufacturer's list.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions under which electrical earthing connections are to be made

and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical earthing system as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical earthing system

work with other work.
C. Earth the electrical installation including, but not limited to, the following:
Underground distribution, substation service equipment, electrical service
system neutral switchgear housings, cabinets, housings and neutrals of
transformers lighting protection system, emergency distribution systems,
busway enclosures, motor control centers, individual starters and other non-
current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
D. Wherever flexible metal conduit or cable are used for part of a raceway run,
provide an earthing conductor in the raceway or cable and connect to earthing
bushings at each end of run.
E. Where pull boxes contain barriers, provide an earth lug in each section.
F. Install earthing conductors in all wiring where non-metallic conduit is used.
G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment earthing conductors

with earthing lug, bus, or bushing.

Section 16060
Page 4 of 5
H. Route earthing connections and conductors to earth and protective devices in
shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
I. Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical

conductivity and circuit inte.
J. Bond all conductive piping system in the building to the electrical system earth.
Make bonding connections as close as practical to the water pipe or service
equipment earthing bar.
K. Where expansion fittings occur, provide internal code size earth conductor
terminating in adjacent pulling points with earthing bushings.
3.3 EARTH TESTS
After installation of the individual earthing systems in accordance with the above for
the various parts of the works and after the whole installation has been connected up,
resistance tests shall be carried out at each sub-station and for each earth source
independently and the readings obtained officially and recorded. Three readings shall
be obtained for each sub-station relating to the two earth paths connected individually
and in parallel.
An Evershed and Vignoles or similar earth tester shall be used and all results
tabulated and handed to the Engineer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical earthing, test ground resistance

with ground resistance tester.
B. Weld earthing conductors to underground earthing electrodes.
C. Earth electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to earthing

electrodes.
D. Earthing each separately-derived system neutral to:
1. Effectively earthed metallic water pipe.

2. Effectively earthed structural steel member.
3. Separate earthing electrode.

Section 16060
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this
Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to electrical identification specified

elsewhere in this specification.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, and services to

complete and make ready for the Owner, the identification of all electrical
equipment as required by this section and other sections of the specifications.
This includes, but is not limited to buried cable warning, power, control and
communication conductors, operational instruction and warnings; danger
signs, and equipment system identification signs.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical

identification products of types required whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

DIN/VDE, IES, NEC, UL, and NEMA standards pertaining to electrical
identification.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more
stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials

and products.
B. Samples, complete with nomenclature for the following:
Rev.01 August, 2018 Electrical Identification

Section 16075
Page 1 of 5
1. Engraved lamacoid plates of each size of lettering.
2. Wraparound labels.
3. Metal tags.
4. Enameled sheet metal signage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LAMACOID NAMEPLATES
A. Identification for power centers, switchboards and panel-boards: Engraved

lamacoid nameplates with 6 mm high white lettering on black background
fastened to the outside face of the front.
B. Identification for distribution switches or circuit breakers of the following:
1. For Individually Enclosed Units: Engraved lamacoid nameplates with

3 mm high white lettering on a black background fastened to outside
front face of enclosure.
2. For Panel-boards Without Doors: Same as for individually enclosed.
3. For Panel-boards With Doors: Typewritten directories mounted behind

transparent plastic cover, in metal frames fastened on inside face of
doors; directories to indicate circuit number, designation of room and
number and item being served in directories.
2.2 WRAPAROUND LABELS AND METAL TAGS
A. Identify the wires and cables of feeders by means of fiber or non-ferrous metal
tags fastened with non-ferrous metal wires or bands throughout; fastenings for
metal tags of the same metal as the tag.
2.3 ENGRAVED LETTERING
A. Engrave device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch-type motor
starters, pilot lights, and the like, whose function is not readily apparent with
3mm high letter suitably describing the equipment controlled or indicated.
2.4 STAMPED LETTERING
A. Stamp phase identification letters into the metal of the bus bars of each phase
of the main busses of each power center switchboard and panelboard; make
letters visible without having to disassemble any current carrying or
supporting elements.

Section 16075
Page 2 of 5
2.5 IDENTIFIABLE MARKINGS
A. Identify each outlet box, junction box and cabinet used in conjunction with
empty raceway for wires of a future system by means of identifiable markings
on the inside denoting the system.
2.6 ENAMELED SHEET METAL SIGNAGE
A. Equip all electric switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces
assigned to electric equipment and the like, with enameled sheet metal "red on
white" signs reading "Electric Equipment Room-No Storage Permitted";
mount signs at clearly visible locations within the rooms.
2.7 ENGRAVE
A. Device plate for receptacles other than 220 volt 10 and 16 amperes receptacles
with 3 mm high black letters and designating the following:
1. Voltage
2. Number of phases
3. Current rating.
B. Device plates for receptacles on emergency, engraved "EMERGENCY" as

described in Section 16143.
2.8 MARK
A. Cabinets housing emergency lighting and receptacle panel-boards with the

word "EMERGENCY" stenciled in 5 cm high red letters on the outside of the
cabinet, in addition to other lettering and nameplates required above.
2.9 NOMENCLATURE
A. The nomenclature used to identify power centers, dimmer boards,

switchboards and panel-boards to match the nomenclature used on the
drawings.
B. The nomenclature used to identify switches or circuit breakers to:
1. Designate where they disconnect mains or service together with

suitable differentiating nomenclature where more than one service or
main is involved.
2. Designate the feeder number and the name of the load supplied where
they control feeders.

Section 16075
Page 3 of 5
3. Designate the name of the space and the load supplied where they
control lighting and appliance branch circuitry.
C. The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables to designate the
feeder number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which electrical identification products are to be

installed. Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical identification

products with other work.
C. Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authority for

identification of electrical work.
D. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical
systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse
of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install signs or similar
equivalent identifications, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and
other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed
instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly
written messages adequate for intended purposes.
E. Install signs at location for best convenience of viewing without interference

with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with
fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate
substrate.
F. Securely fasten signage and nameplates.

Section 16075
Page 4 of 5
G. Identify each wire or cable in a feeder at its terminal points of connection and
in each hand-hole, pull box, junction box and panel gutter through which it
passes.
H. Label all conductors in wire-ways and pull and junction boxes with panel-
board designations and circuit number.
I. Identify Individually:
1. MV switchgear
2. RMU ring main units
3. Transformer
4. Switchboards
5. Main and feeder devices in switchboard
6. Distribution and circuit breaker panel-board
7. Safety switches
8. Audio-visual equipment cabinets
9. Boxes for fire alarm system
10. Cabinets, junction and pull boxes of all systems installed, i.e., fire
alarm (life safety) system, telephone, television, security, etc.

Section 16075
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
Section.
C. Testing and commissioning, section 16950
D. The requirements of this section apply to wire and cable work specified elsewhere
in these specifications.
A. Work includes providing all wires, cables and connections, complete with all
accessories in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a
complete system. Wiring size referenced in this Section is metric, except as noted.
For special wiring for individual systems, refer to respective Section of these
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wires, cables, and

connections of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of the latest standard of the

Egyptian Electricity Authority applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL,
NEMA, ICEA, IEEE, and ASTM Standards pertaining to wires, cables and
connections.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
provision will govern.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Wires And Cables

Section 16120
Page 1 of 19
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on wires, cables, terminations and

connectors.
B. Samples: Submit 25cm length cables of each type and size of wires and Cables,
Manufacturer Name, insulation class and reference No. Should be indicated on
the Submitted Sample.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MAINS AND SUBFEEDER CABLES
A. GENERAL
Provide all of the mains cables shown on the drawings or detailed in the cable
schedules or the schedules of work.
All single and multi-core cables shall comply with IEC 502 and all conductors
shall be Aluminum or copper P.V.C. and XLPE insulated and P.V.C. sheathed
(0.6/1 K.v), armoured type as indicated on the drawings.
Copper conductors shall be stranded for sections 3mm2 and above. Signal and
control cables shall have solid conductors. Flexible cords shall have finely
stranded conductors.
Conductor sizes shall be metric, as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with

cross-sectional areas smaller than specified will not be accepted.
The current carrying capacity of conductors have been determined in accordance

with the Regulations for the specified type of insulation and the expected
conditions of installation. No change will be accepted in the specified type of
insulation, unless warranted by special conditions and approved by the Engineer.
The insulation of each conductor shall be colour coded or otherwise identified as

required by the Regulations. Colour coding shall be maintained throughout the
entire installation.
For each lot of cable supply a certificate of origin issued by the manufacturer
stating its origin, manufacturer, constitution and standards to which it complies
with. In the absence of such documents, the Engineer reserves the right to require
that tests, at the Contractor's expense, be performed by an official laboratory on
samples taken from lots of cables delivered to the Site.

Section 16120
Page 2 of 19
Be responsible for any delays in the work resulting from non-compliance with the
requirements mentioned above.
Cable installations whether so indicated or not shall include all joints and their
accessories at terminating ends or at tap-off points, earthing and bonding etc.
Carried to completion.
Joints in cable shall not be accepted unless so required in the Drawings. Cables
shall be supplied in lengths sufficient for a straight-through pull from termination
to termination.
The definition of "Low Voltage" given in the IEE wiring regulations shall apply
and "High Voltage" shall mean any voltage higher than low voltage.
All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels, or other
proof of origin intact. Such labels and seals shall not be removed until the cable is
required for use, and shall be retained for inspection.
Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings or in the cable

schedules all cable over sheaths shall be black.
Cables shall be handled, terminated and installed in accordance with the cable
manufacturer's recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's
recommendations. The technical advice of the manufacturer's specialists shall be
followed if any special conditions or unusual circumstances apply.
Where cable sizes are not indicated on the drawings or in the cable schedules, the
contractor shall be responsible for determining the correct size of each cable.
Cable sizes shall be determined on the basis of current rating and/or voltage drop
and/or earth loop impedance, together within allowance for grouping with other
cables and the method of installation, whichever is relevant, after taking into
account the type of cable, the ambient conditions, the method of installation and
the disposition of each cable relative to other cables.
Full details, with illustrations, of all cable supports and fixing devices shall be
submitted before any orders are placed or work put in hand. All cable supports
and fixing devices shall be designed to have a factor of safety of not less than 4
Wherever cables pass through walls, ceilings, partitions and the like, a heavy-
gauge PVC sleeve shall be provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12
mm, but not more than 25 mm, than the diameter of the cable.

Section 16120
Page 3 of 19
The length of any such sleeve shall be such that each end projects by 5 mm
beyond the surface of the element through which it passes, and the ends of they
bore shall be provided with an adequate radius to prevent chafing of the cable
sheath.
Wherever cables pass through floors a heavy-gravy-gauge steel sleeve shall be

provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 12 mm, but not more than 25
mm, than the diameter of the cable and projecting above floor level by at least 50
mm.
Where cables pass through walls and/or floors which form part of the building's
fire compartmentation, the hole(s) through which the cables pass shall be sealed
after the cables have been installed, so as to give the same standard of fire
resistance as the original wall or floor. Details of the proposed sealing method
shall be submitted prior to implementation.
All cables shall be separated from water, gas, and other piped services by a
distance of not less than 150 mm unless the circumstances of the installation make
this impossible.
Fire resistant cables will be used as indicated on the drawings and it shall be
copper conductors, XLPE/Steel wire armoured type fire rated for 3hours (950 °C),
category C,W and Z with normal operating temperature (90°C) to meet BS 6387.
2.2 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATIONS
Cabling and wiring installation shall be performed strictly in compliance with the
IEE wiring regulation.
Indoor distribution feeders and sub-feeders such as to distribution panel boards,

motor control-gear, isolating switches etc.
Shall be in the form of single conductor pulled inside conduits, or raceways or

multi-conductor cables clipped on cable trays, all as generally shown on the
Drawings.
Where two or more cables are run in parallel, they shall be fixed on galvanized
steel trays or in approved special cable supporting and protecting raceways.
Cables shall be fixed to the supporting structures with approved galvanized cast
steel clamps at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.

Section 16120
Page 4 of 19
No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders and sub- feeders.
Wires and cables shall be routed in such a way that they are not exposed to
excessive heat or to corrosive agents. If such a condition cannot be complied with
the wires and cables shall be of a type designed for the particular condition or
enclosed in the necessary protective raceway, duct, concrete etc.
The cables installed inside the tunnels should be covered by fire resisting coating,
tenderers (the cable supplier) should submit the technical specification and test
procedures for the coating.
Note: all cables inside the tunnels should be covered with fire resisting coating
material which comply with the international standard specification IEC 60-332,
or IEEE383.
Tenderer should submit the type of this material including the technical
specifications and test procedures for the coating material.
The current carrying capacity of power cables should not be affected by the fire
retardant coating when applied at the thickness recommended by the manufacturer
and listed in the fire test reports.
B. FINAL SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING
Final sub-circuit work originating from light and power panel boards shall be
arranged as shown on the Drawings.
Final sub-circuit wiring shall have insulation class level not less than (450/750V).
Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings, all final sub-circuit for
corridor lighting and sockets shall be multi core cables installed on cable tray
above false ceiling.
At least 150 mm of free conductor shall be left at each outlet, switch point and
pull box for the making up of joints, or the connection of fixtures or devices,
except where conductors are intended to loop without joints through lamp holders,
receptacles and similar device boxes.
Generally, branch circuit conductor sizes are indicated on the drawings. Such
sizes are minimum requirements and must be increased, where required, to suit
the length of run and voltage drop, at no extra cost. Voltage drop from distribution
transformers to furthest outlets shall be maximum 5%.
C. WIRES AND CABLES-LIGHT AND POWER-LOW VOLTAGE
All wires and cables shall be manufactured to comply with the relevant Standard
Specification I.E.C. or equal standard. The cables delivered to the Site shall bear
Section 16120
Page 5 of 19
the mark of identification of the manufacturer and the Standard to which it is
manufactured. Any cable not having identification marks shall be rejected.
D. TERMINATIONS OF L.V. WIRES AND CABLES
Terminations of wires and cables of sizes up to 16 mm², shall be tightly twisted

and where possible doubled back before being clamped. Where two or more
wires are looped into the same terminal these conductors shall be tightly twisted
together before being inserted into the terminals.
Wires and cables of sizes over 16 mm² shall terminate with sweated or
compression type lugs. Insulating sleeve shall be used to protect any exposed part
of the conductor or sleeve projecting beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting
of a live terminal.
Glands for the various types of multi core cables shall be purpose made and
suitable for the equipment enclosure.
E. JOINTS AND TAPS ON L.V. WIRES AND CABLES
Joints and taps in multi core or single core feeders and sub- feeders shall be
effected in purpose made kits consisting of outer containing mould, thermosetting
insulating compound (or resin) and by use of appropriate tinned copper ferrules
crimped onto the conductors and taped before pouring in the compound.
Joints or taps on L.V. wires and cables shall be permanently accessible, and
unless permitted otherwise shall be made only in tap boxes or cabinet gutters.
Joints in branch circuits of conductor sizes up to 16 mm² shall be made by barrel
type connectors with pinching screws, the whole shielded in porcelain or
self-setting compound shroud. Shrouds of polythene or similar non-heat resistant
materials will not be permitted.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes larger than 10 mm² shall be made by
means of pre-insulated spring-type spring shall be corrosion resistant tempered
metal. Enclosure shall be a steel shell with an overall vinyl cap and skirt.
Connector shall be equal to "Scotchlock" as manufactured by the 3M Company.
Joints in branch circuit conductor sizes 16 mm², and larger shall be made by
two-bolt clamps protected with an insulating phenolic cover.
2.3 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES : JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 16120
Page 6 of 19
Multicore or single core 18/30(36)KV cables shall be compacted circular stranded
plain copper or aluminum conductors (as indicated in the drawings) extruded by
semi conducting layers as conductor screen, XLPE insulated, extruded by semi
conducting layer as insulation screen (bonded type) screened by copper tape,
extruded by poly vinyl chloride (PVC) as an inner covering and armoured with
double steel tapes (if armouring required in the drawings), banded with
polypropylene tape and extruded by PVC as an outer sheath.
The insulation class shall not be less than 18/30 (36) KV. Cables shall comply
with IEC 60502-2, BS 6622 and E.E.A specifications.
Cables sizes and types shall be as shown on the drawings.
CONSTRUCTION
Each conductor shall have a zone resistant layer of cross- linked polyethylene
(XLPE) extruded on the screened conductor.
The thickness shall be 5.5 mm to correspond with the relevant IEC publication
60502-2 for 24 k.V. insulation level.
The cables must be suitable for:-
 Maximum conductor operating temp. : 90oC.
 Maximum screen operating temp. : 80oC.
 Maximum conductor temp. during S.C : 250oC.
Each core (insulated conductor) shall be screened by either a semi conducting,

tape or layer of extruded semi conducting compound, but shall be completely free
stripping.
Each screened core shall be shielded with a layer of copper tape.
Each shielded core shall have an extruded sheath of thermoplast, to prevent

moisture from penetrating and provides a good corrosion protection.
Identification of cables shall be carried out by embossing on the outer PVC sheath
the voltage rating (class), size and number of conductors, manufacturer's name
throughout the whole length of cables.

Section 16120
Page 7 of 19
Identification of phases shall be carried out by using numbered plastic tapes (1, 2
& 3) throughout the whole core under the copper shield.
B. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TERMINATIONS
Shielded power cable termination kits shall be factory engineered for the
application.
The kits shall consist of high-permittivity, high-resistivity, heat-shrinkable stress

control tubing and outer insulation tubing, made from UV-stable, non-tracking
(per ASTM D 2302) materials. Heat activated sealant materials to help prevent
moisture ingress and contamination should also be included.
Termination kits shall meet or exceed all rating requirements of IEEE-48 for class
I terminations and the test sequence prescribed by IEEE-404, including 130 C
load cycling and 130 C impulse withstand.
In addition to the phase terminations, multi conductor termination kits shall

provide a heat-shrinkable breakout boot, factory-coated with sealant for strain-
relief and sealing purposes.
Each kit shall include lengths of heat-shrinkable tubing to help prevent corrosion
and shifting of the shielding layers between the boot and the phase termination
installation point.
When grounding conductors are included, the kit includes lengths of heat-
shrinkable tubing and sealant material to seal each conductor from the boot to its
connection point.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF L.V and H.V CABLES
Except in the case where it is terminated in full view onto a clearly labelled switch,
starter, distribution board or similar piece of apparatus, or onto a motor or other
item of equipment the function of which is evident, each and every cable end shall
be provided with an approved means of identification. In particular, this
requirement shall apply to all cables terminating on the back, or in the base, of
cubicle type or similar switchboard or control panel and in any other case where the
function of the cable is not immediately obvious.
The means of identification shall be as follows:-
(i) An engraved brass or aluminum label securely fixed to the cable sealing box.

Section 16120
Page 8 of 19
(ii) An engraved brass or aluminum label securely tied to the cable with
galvanized iron or tinned copper binding wire.
Self-adhesive embossed plastic labels will not be accepted as permanent

means of identification.
The means of identification shall give the cable size, number of cores, and
function together with the cable reference number if one has been allocated.
The cores of all control cables shall be individually identified, at terminations, by

means of approved plastic ferrules bearing indelible characters, in accordance
with the numbering on the relevant wiring diagrams.
All cables run above and under ground shall be identified by means of engraved
brass or aluminum label at intervals not exceeding 30 meters. The labels shall
bear details of the cable size, number of cores, function, and reference number (if
any) and shall be securely attached to the cables with galvanized iron or tinned
copper binding wires.
2.5 INSPERCTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to:-
2.5.1 Cables, Low-Voltage, 600 Volt Maximum
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and evidence of

overheating.
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by

calibrated torque-wrench method.
3. Perform thermographic survey.
3. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and

indentation.

Section 16120
Page 9 of 19
2. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-

resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to

ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc
for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test
duration shall be one minute.
3. Test Values
1. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels.
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the
normal range as indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If
manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values which deviate
from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

obtained results but not less than two megohms.
2.5.2 Cables medium-voltage
1. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and evidence of

overheating and corona.
2. Inspect terminations and splices for evidence of overheating and corona.
following methods:

calibrated torque-wrench method.

Section 16120
Page 10 of 19
4. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
5. Inspect shield grounding, cable support, and termination.
6. Verify that visible cable bends meet or exceed ICEA and/or

manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius.
7. Inspect fireproofing in common cable areas.
8. If cables are terminated through window-type current transformers,

inspect to verify that neutral and ground conductors are correctly placed
and that shields are correctly terminated for operation of protective
devices.
2. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-

2. Perform an insulation-resistance test utilizing a megohmmeter with a voltage

output of at least 2500 volts. Individually test each conductor with all other
conductors and shields grounded. Test duration shall be one minute.
3. Perform a shield-continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method.
4. Perform a dc high-potential test on all cables. Adhere to all precautions and limits
as specified in the applicable NEMA/ICEA standard for the specific cable.
Perform tests in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 400. Test procedure shall
be as follows, and the results for each cable test shall be recorded as specified
herein. Test voltages shall not exceed 60 percent of cable manufacturer's factory
test value.
The tests shall be carried out as follows:-
1. Insure that the input voltage to the test set is regulated.
2. Current-sensing circuits in test equipment shall measure only the leakage

current associated with the cable under test and shall not include internal
leakage of the test equipment.
3. Record wet- and dry-bulb temperatures or relative humidity and

temperature.

Section 16120
Page 11 of 19
4. Test each section of cable individually.
5. Test each conductor individually with all other conductors grounded.

Ground all shields.
6. Terminations shall be adequately corona-suppressed by guard ring, field

reduction sphere, or other suitable method, as necessary.
7. Insure that the maximum test voltage does not exceed the limits for
terminators specified in ANSI/IEEE Standard 48, IEEE 386, or
manufacturer's specifications.
8. Apply a dc high-potential test in at least five equal increments until

maximum test voltage is reached. No increment shall exceed the voltage
rating of the cable. Record dc leakage current at each step after a constant
stabilization time consistent with system charging current.
9. Raise the conductor to the specified maximum test voltage and hold for
five minutes. Record readings of leakage current at 30 seconds and one
minute and at one minute intervals thereafter.
10. Reduce the conductor test potential to zero and measure residual voltage at
discrete intervals.
11. Apply grounds for a time period adequate to drain all insulation stored
charge.
3. Test Values
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with Table 10.12 unless

otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
4. Shielding shall exhibit continuity. Investigate resistance values in excess

of ten ohms per 1000 feet of cable.

Section 16120
Page 12 of 19
5. Minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously
6. Graphic plots may be made of leakage current versus step voltage at each
increment and leakage current versus time at final test voltages.
1. The step voltage slope should be reasonably linear.
2. Capacitive and absorption current should decrease continually until

steady state leakage is approached.
7. Compare test results to previously obtained results.
2.6 SMALL WIRING
For the purpose of this specification, the description "small wiring" shall apply to
all low voltage cables and wiring connected directly or indirectly to the public
electricity supply system, or to any independent private supply system for the
purpose of supplying electricity to general power and lighting circuits, except the
following:
(i) telephone, public address, and other communication circuits,
(ii) fire detection, alarm, and other security circuits operating at a voltage
level of 24 volts or less between conductors.
(iii) cables and wiring forming part of a system for the control and/or
supervision of the building engineering services.
All of the above cables and wiring included are fully described elsewhere in this
Specification under appropriate headings.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant British
Standards.
The contractor shall submit with his Tender details of any internationally
recognized Standards and Codes of practice he proposes to use in lieu of, or in
addition to, those stated.
All wiring shall be carried out using one or more of the following wring systems,
as indicated on the drawings.

Section 16120
Page 13 of 19
(i) single-core unsheathed cables drawn into metallic or non-metallic conduit
and/or trunking as specified elsewhere.
(ii) twin- and/or multi-core sheathed cables, armored or unarmored, clipped to

building surfaces or structures or to cable tray as specified elsewhere.
(iii) mineral insulated cables, sheathed or clipped to building surfaces or

structures or to cable tray as specified elsewhere.
(iv) flexible cords and/or cables.
All cables to be used for small wiring shall comply with the relevant DIN/VDE
and IEC Standards.
PVC cables to and rubber cables to IEC/DIN/VDE shall not under any
circumstances be run underground.
No cables shall be installed unless the ambient temperature and the temperature of
the cable are above 0 oC, and have been so for the preceding 24 hours.
Where cables have subjected to temperatures below 0 oC, care shall be taken to
ensure that they are above that temperature for 24 hours before installation.
2.7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which wires, cables and connections are to be installed.
Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT BALANCING
1. Connect all branch lighting and power circuits to panel boards so as to balance the
actual loads (wattage) within 5%. If required, transpose branch circuits when the
work is complete to meet this requirement.
2. At the request of the Project Manager or Consultant, perform all necessary tests to
show the above requirement has been fulfilled. Make such tests after the building is
Section 16120
Page 14 of 19
occupied.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires, cables and connectors as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies
with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with
other work.
C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same
raceway.
D. Use anti-seize compound for copper lug connections to bus bars.
E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable
grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
G. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours, where possible.
H. Complete conduit or raceway installation (joints made up tightly and the entire
run secured in place) before pulling wire and cable.
I. Do not pull thermoplastic wires at temperatures lower than-170 oC
J. Support wires and cables at the upper end of all risers and at intermediate points
as required by the approved manufacturer and applicable electrical codes.
K. Seal, between the wire and conduit with a non-hardening compound approved for
the purpose, cable and wire entering a building from underground where cable
exits the conduit.
L. Install cable spacers where required. Provide conduit fittings for spacing of
cables at terminations, consisting of galvanized or cadmium plates, steel or
malleable iron threaded conduit and fittings and inserts of non-metallic insulating
material with openings adequate to accommodate cables being spaced.
M. In certain systems, equipment furnished by an approved manufacturer may
require a different number and arrangement of conductors from that indicated on

Section 16120
Page 15 of 19
the Drawings. In such cases, comply with such requirements at no additional cost
to the Owner.
N. In wire ways and large pull boxes, lace and tie off conductors in groups of 3
phases and neutral (if used) as installed in conduits to limit conductor unbalanced
loading.
O. Leave all wires with sufficient slack at terminal ends and lighting fixtures for
convenient connections and servicing. Stow loose ends neatly in outlet box.
P. Provide splices and taps in accessible boxes, panel boards fittings, gutters,
terminal panels, etc., only. Provide materials compatible with the conductors,
insulation’s and protective jackets on the cables and wires.
Q. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
R. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent-or- better mechanical strength
and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use connectors which are
compatible with conductor material.
S. Tie all circuit and control wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes, and junction
boxes.
T. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and
terminals to comply with tightening torques as specified by approved
manufacturer.
U. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring
diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper
interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
V. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater

insulation resistivity rating than, electrical insulation rating of those conductors
being spliced.
W. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and
insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires
are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on
conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. Cut
armored jackets with tools made specifically for that purpose.

Section 16120
Page 16 of 19
X. Do not install thermoplastic wires in computer area raised floors.
Y. All wires and cables installed in the return air ceiling spaces or similar areas to be
installed in metallic raceways.
Z. The underground cables shall be laid below the ground level. After the cables are
laid, the trenches shall be back-Filled to a depth of 15 cm with fine selected soil
free from lumps metallic or other foreign inclusions or where required by
engineer by fine sand. A continuous row of bricks shall be laid, then the
remainder of the trench shall be back filled in an approved manner with soil,
which shall be thoroughly consolidated.
Where the cables cross the asphalt roads and enter into building, they shall pass
through pipes type UPVC of size as indicated on the drawings.
3.4 SITE MANHOLES
A. Constructed of 32 Newton/mm2 (4,000 psi), in 28 days, concrete with steel

reinforcement and chimneys where indicated or required. Each manhole shall
have sufficient depth to accommodate required grading of ducts, as well as
maintaining minimum distance of 22 cm from bottom of lowest duct centerline
entering manhole to finished floor line and/or top duct to roof of manhole.
Manhole shall be built on, or placed over, a 150 mm layer of well tamped gravel
and 50 mm mud slab. Prior to installation, a 2.5 mm base membrane
polyurethane membrane is to be installed (See subsequent Paragraph B).
Minimum overall sizes and details as indicated on the drawings & as approved on
the shop drawings.
B. All manholes shall be watertight and furnished with sump pits. Floor shall be
graded in order to accommodate draining to pit. Outside surfaces of manhole and
pull boxes shall be coated with an approved polyurethane water-proofing coating
of 1.8 mm minimum thickness (all sides and roof). Care shall be taken to assure
bonding of side coating with base membrane.
C. Bolted and Gasketed Manhole Frames and Covers: Cast iron of indicated size.
Set frame and cover to final grade as indicated or required. Fully coordinate with
the civil and landscape details.
D. Duct envelopes and conduit shall enter manholes and pull boxes at right angles to
box wall.

Section 16120
Page 17 of 19
E. Cables shall be well supported on walls by cable racks, attached to the wall with
hot dipped galvanized machine bolts and stainless steel inserts, and equipped with
adjustable rack arms and insulators. At least two cable racks shall be installed
and/or as scheduled on drawings, with not less than two spare rack arms on each
cable rack. Insulators not required on spare rack arms.
F. Bolt or studs imbedded in concrete for cable rack mounting are not acceptable.
G. Install pulling eye irons imbedded in walls opposite each duct entrance plus the
floor, and securely fastened to the manhole reinforcing rods before concrete is
poured.
H. All hardware used in the manhole shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

I. In manholes and pullboxes, bond to "Z" bar ground bus with 35 mm2 bare copper
ground all metal non-current carrying parts, e.g., cable racks, frames, bushings,
etc.
J. Manhole frames and covers shall be cast iron, watertight, heavy duty type,
suitable for roads, pavement and garden loading, and have machined bearing
surfaces. Each unit (frame and cover) shall withstand not less than 400 KN , and
be set to final grade as required. Covers to be indented solid top design, with two
drop handles each. The word "Light Current manhole" or "Power manhole" , as
appropriate, shall be cast on the upper side of each cover.
A. Check for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with drawings.
B. Megger conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for continuity and

insulation tests before connection to utilization devices for the following:
1. 100 percent of feeders

2. 10 percent of branch circuits
3. 100 percent of 3-phase motor branch circuits, 18.5 kw (25 HP) and over
C. Perform tests prior to connecting equipment and in presence of authorized

representatives.
D. Submit written reports of test results.
E. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short
circuits.

Section 16120
Page 18 of 19
F. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate
functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct
malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units
which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

Section 16120
Page 19 of 19
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 (General Requirements) apply to work of this
section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, applies to work of

this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to raceways specified elsewhere in

this specification.
A. Work includes providing completely coordinated grounded raceway systems

complete with boxes, fittings, supports, anchors, sleeves, hangers, clamps,
straps, seals, flexible connections to vibrating equipment and accessories, as
specified and as required for a complete system. Conduit or tubing sizes
referred to in the specifications and on the Drawings are nominal internal
diameters. Raceway is required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or
specified otherwise.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems,

boxes and fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in

VDE/DIN, IEC, BS, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways,
boxes and fittings. Provide raceways, boxes and components which have
been UL listed and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including

specifications and installation instructions, for each type of raceway system
and box required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with
requirements.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Raceways, Boxes And Fittings

Section 16130
Page 1 of 14
B. Samples: Submit 15cm length of exposed type surface raceways with
required finish, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
C. Shop Drawings: submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural

backgrounds of raceways, boxes and fitting including, but not limited to size
of raceways, boxes and fittings elevations, type and reference no.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Full weight steel pipe hot dipped galvanized
inside and outside, threaded, minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted;
minimum 15mm for switch legs.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid intermediate grade, hot dipped

galvanized outside, threaded, minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted;
minimum 15mm for switch legs.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Thin wall steel, galvanized, threadless,

minimum 20mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15mm for switch legs.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit: Continuous length of specially wound interlocked,

galvanized strip steel, minimum 20mm.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Continuous length of flexible

interlocked, galvanized inside and outside steel tubing, with a continuous
copper bonding conductor wound specially between the convolution, coated
with a liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum
20mm
F. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit
1. Self-extinguishing and heavy gauge conduits and conduit fittings to

meet
BS 4607, BS 6099 and BS7671 wiring regulations.
2. For concrete encasement.
3. For direct burial, Schedule 40 conduit.
4. Minimum 20 mm for lighting and power wiring, minimum 16 mm for

telephone installation.
G. Wireways: Steel, minimum 1.5mm thickness, with screw-on covers, raceway

knockout, elbow fittings, hangers, wire retainers, and cabinet adapter; size as
noted or required.

Section 16130
Page 2 of 14
2.2 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. GENERAL
1. Accessories as required including, but not limited to, bushings,

knockout closures, locknuts, mounting brackets, device box
extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plasterboard
expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes
being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring
situation.
2. Die-cast fittings not permitted.
3. Earthing (grounding) Bushings: With lug suitable for the size and type
of earthing (grounding) conductor to be terminated.
B. RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS
1. Steel or malleable iron, standard threaded couplings, locknuts,

bushings, and elbows.
2. Conductive type thread compounds to insure low resistance ground

continuity through conduit. Watertight couplings and connections in
concrete.
3. Locknuts of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the
metal wall of the enclosure.
4. Bushings of the metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating

insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting.
5. Corrosion resistant metallic conduit fittings.
6. Sealing fittings of the threaded cast iron type. Where sealing fittings
are used to prevent passage of water vapor, utilize the continuous
drain type.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Steel or malleable iron concrete tight

couplings and connectors of the gland and ring compression type; set screw
type connectors are permitted for interior dry locations only, indent type
connectors are not permitted.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Steel or malleable iron, insulated throat

angle wedge type.
E. Surface Metal Raceway Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer to

match integrity of raceway system.

Section 16130
Page 3 of 14
F. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit Fittings: As recommended by the manufacturer
to match integrity of each type of raceway system.
G. EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS
1. Comply with approved applicable standards.
2. Accommodate 1.9 cm deflection, expansion and contraction in any

direction.
3. Allow 30 degree angular deflection.
4. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground

continuity and fault currents.
5. Watertight, seismically qualified corrosion resistant threaded and

compatible with associated conduit.
6. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion resistant, watertight, moisture and heat

resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
H. SUPPORTS
1. Zinc coated or equivalent.
2. Conduit hangers, designed for the purpose and have pre-assembled

closure bolt and nut and provision for receiving hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers not less than 38cm x 38cm, 2,7mm
thickness steel, cold formed, dipped clamps. Hanger rods not less than
0.95 cm diameter steel.
4. Anchors of types, sizes and materials designed for the purpose.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES
A. OUTLET BOXES
1. PVC heavy gauge for concealed work, and galvanized cast iron or
aluminum with threaded hubs for exposed work; boxes of shapes,
cubic inch capacity, and sizes as required, suitable for installation at
respective location.
2. With mounting holes and with cable and conduit size knockout
openings.

Section 16130
Page 4 of 14
3. With threaded screw holes, with corrosion resistant ridged cover and
grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers,
and for equipment grounding.
4. For concealed work, utilize 10cm square or octagon outlet boxes,

except as otherwise required by construction devices or wiring and as
follows:
a. Above ceiling: 3.8cm deep.
b. In ceiling or slab: 7.6cm deep.
c. In wall for fixtures: 7cm deep.
d. In wall for receptacles and switches: 3.8cm deep.
e. With raised covers and fixture studs where required.
f. Back-to-back boxes type not permitted.
g. Gangable type boxes are not permitted.
h. For installation of more than two devices in a common outlet

box, utilize boxes and device rings manufactured specifically for
this purpose.
i. Outlet box device rings used to be of sufficient depth so as to

make the use of extension boxes and rings unnecessary.
5. For exposed work utilize 10cm round x 5cm deep for mounting on
ceilings and 10cm square x 5cm deep for mounting on walls, except
as otherwise required by construction, devices, or wiring.
6. Provide blank covers for outlet boxes without devices. Covers to

match adjacent plates.
2.4 WIRING TROUGHS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Heavy gauge PVC, galvanized sheet steel with screw-on covers for interior
work, and galvanized cast iron and/or 2.7mm thickness stainless steel with
threaded hubs, gaskets for outdoors and damp locations; boxes of shapes,
cubic cm capacity, and sizes as required, suitable for installation at
respectable location.
B. Insulated cable supports.

Section 16130
Page 5 of 14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings

are to be installed and substrate which will support raceways. Notify
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Install raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings as indicated, in

accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions,
requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
2. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways,
boxes, and components with other work. Run raceways concealed,
except as noted.
3. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways

for conductors to form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to
electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide electrical continuity
and firm mechanical assembly. Maintain grounding continuity of
interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductor.
4. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate

possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact,
coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.
5. Support raceways by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, wall

brackets with back spacer, structural steel angles or channels.
Support riser raceways at each floor. Secure raceways to supports
with pipe straps or U-bolts. Space supports as per applicable
electrical code and per manufacturer's recommendations, unless
otherwise indicated.
6. Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry,

expansion shields or inserts on concrete and brick, machine screws

Section 16130
Page 6 of 14
on metal, wood screws on wood. Nails, raw plugs, wood, and/or
plastic plugs are not permitted.
7. Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and boilers. Also, do not

obstruct headroom, doorways, or walkways, with raceway.
8. Do not install conduit in terrazzo floors.
9. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece

unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically
designed and manufactured for their particular application.
10. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment

furnished by equipment supplier. Set conduit and boxes for
connection to equipment only after receiving dimensioned drawings
from equipment installer and after checking location with other
trades.
11. Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball
mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects ball mandrel.
12. Provide long radius bends for empty raceway systems where required
to satisfy the system cabling requirements.
13. Install complete raceway runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install
raceways so that required conductors may be drawn in without injury
or excessive strain to raceway or cable. Where raceway size is not
indicated, follow applicable code.
14. Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction.
15. For empty raceways over 3m long, provide fish or pull wire. For
3.8cm and larger pull wire to consist of steel core nylon rope and
terminal ball.
16. Remove damaged or deformed raceways.
17. Do not support branch circuit conduits by the suspended ceiling or its
supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air
conditioning ducts.
18. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings.
Avoid present and future openings in floor, wall or ceiling
construction, when so indicated on drawings.
19. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 45cm from parallel runs of

fuels or boiler breaching and 15cm from hot water pipes or other
sources of heat. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs

Section 16130
Page 7 of 14
above water and steam piping. Provide thermal insulation where
these separations cannot be maintained.
20. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
21. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is

prohibited. Where required, use 3-piece union or split coupling.
22. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where

blanks have been removed.
23. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready

accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring.
24. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150
mm separation.
25. Do not install aluminum products in concrete. Plug and seal conduit
interconnections.
26. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish
thickness.
27. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural

surfaces to which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in
concrete or masonry.
28. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction

debris and damage.
29. Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Secure boxes to
the building structure and adequately support all boxes during
construction to prevent movement.
30. Verify outlet locations in finished spaces with Architectural

Drawings or Interior Design drawings, details and finishes. Take
caution in locating outlet to allow for overhead pipes, ducts, and
variations in arrangement, thickness in finish, window trim and other
Architectural Construction Details.
31. Correct any inaccuracy in locating outlets without additional expense

to the Owner. Refer to Architect any condition that would place an
outlet box in an unsuitable location, such as a molding, break glass in
wall finish, or behind a heating enclosure.
32. Mount outlet boxes for similar equipment at uniform height within
same or similar areas. Where mounting height or location of outlets

Section 16130
Page 8 of 14
is not shown or specified, mount outlet as best suited for equipment
connected thereto, or as directed.
33. Provide barriers between switches connected to different phases.
34. Except where special outlets are required, provide 10cm square wall
outlets with single gang raised cover and bushed plate for signaling
systems.
35. In cold rooms, walk-in refrigeration boxes, etc., when applicable

weatherproof raceway installations and use sealing fittings and
compounds as entries.
36. For conduit or cable tray runs exposed inside the building, mark
(stencil 3 M on centers, including in hung ceiling, with the notation,
"Danger, Volts," indicating the actual voltage (i.e. "Danger 11,000
Volts," "Danger 380 Volts").
37. Install conduits located underground beyond the building as follows:
a. With a minimum of 60 cm top cover, above the conduits, and

sloped away from the building.
b. Placed over well tamped trench bottom and on concrete block

1.5 M on center. Anchor conduits to prevent their movement.
Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 15 cm apart. Make all
joints watertight.
c. With a minimum clear separation between the electric and

telephone conduits of 30 cm of well tamped earth or 15 cm of
concrete.
38. For conduits and direct burial cable entering the building and for the
manholes preceding the conduits entry to the building, when
applicable perform the following:
a. Plug all empty raceways.
b. Enter through floor or wall entrance fittings. For the entrance

fittings utilize a gland assembly cable of provide seal around
the conduit or cable to withstand 15M head of water without
leakage.
c. Slope away from building.
d. In lieu of wall entrance fittings through floor or wall, 2.5 mm

metal plates may be utilized subject to the following:

Section 16130
Page 9 of 14
1) Plate extends a minimum of 100mm from raceway in
every direction.
2) Plate is welded to raceways forming a watertight seal.
3) Raceways are not damaged.
39. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and
other utilities to avoid damaging them.
40. Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations

exposed to weather or moisture.
41. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.
Coordinate trim with type of finish, i.e., tile, carpet, etc.
B. For all vibrating equipment adjacent or above acoustically treated areas,

provide the following:
1. Flexible conduit at the entries, exits, and outlets.
2. Sealing fittings with compound at the entries and exits.
3. Supports of rubber-in-shear ceiling hangers.
4. Expansion fittings at isolating slab joints.
5. Rubber gasketed recessed outlets.
6. Back plaster recessed outlets.
7. Free-standing equipment with vibration isolators.
C. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use rigid steel conduit for underground installation, in wet or damp

locations, for exposed runs on the exterior of the building, in
concrete slabs, for all feeder conduits, in mechanical equipment
spaces, and as noted.
2. Where conduit is directly buried, provide two coats of polyurethane.

Dry thoroughly between coats and before backfilling.
3. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above
5mm with concrete envelope with walls not less than 8cm thick.
D. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT

Section 16130
Page 10 of 14
1. Use intermediate metal conduit in lieu of rigid steel conduit where
permitted by applicable electrical codes.
2. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above
5cm with concrete envelope not less than 8cm thick.
E. ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
1. Use electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits only, in dry

locations (hung ceilings, hollow block walls and furred spaces) and
for fire alarm, smoke and fire detection system where in accordance
with all applicable codes, authorities, etc.
2. EMT is not permitted to be used in mechanical equipment spaces and

where subject to moisture, dampness, i.e. plenums, condensate
spillage, etc.
F. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use flexible steel conduit with an internal earth (ground) connection

for short connections where rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable
and for final connections to vibrating equipment.
2. Provide a minimum length of 46cm with slack. Connect the earth

(ground) conductor to the enclosure or raceway at each end.
G. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
1. For damp and wet conditions and in all plenums.
2. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to motor
terminal boxes, transformers and other vibrating equipment.
3. Provide a minimum length of 45cm with slack. Connect the ground

conductor to the enclosure or raceway at each end.
H. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)
1. Use in or below slabs for service entrance conductors for lighting

system and telephone service for lightning protection down
conductors and only as otherwise indicated. Provide separate
earthing (ground) wire.
2. Cut ends square, ream smooth, wipe clean, apply approved solvent
cement and quarter turn as drawing up tight in accordance with
recommendations of manufacturer.

Section 16130
Page 11 of 14
3. Convert to steel conduit using adapters when entering the building
from underground locations.
4. Maintain a 1M minimum clearance of PVC conduits from hot water

and steam lines, when applicable.
5. Where located under building, parking lot, and roadways, concrete

encase conduit for all runs above 50mm, when applicable.
6. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be of the same manufacture to

provide a consistent system with compatible appearance. The use of
alternative designs and different manufacturer's products will not be
permitted.
7. All conduit joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacture's

installation recommendations using a solvent adhesive recommended
by the maker of the conduit. All such joints shall be watertight.
The same conditions shall apply to joints between conduit, fittings

and accessories. The dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent
adhesives is expressly forbidden. Before joints are made, conduit
ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be
removed. Care should be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement
dust and oil from all faces of conduits and accessories prior to
jointing. Conduits shall be entered fully into box spouts and butted
into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
8. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for
on the drawings or when the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal
equipment, conduit and fittings with screwed entries. Where such
entries are not available, non-screwed male bushes and couplers shall
be used.
9. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints or where there are

changes of temperature in excess of 25 C, flexibility of the conduit to
cope with the associated movement shall be achieved by a method
approved by the manufacture of the conduit.
10. All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes
of 25 mm and below may be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set
hot. A pipe vice shall not be used during this or any other operation.
The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than 4 time the
outside diameter of the conduit. Naked flames shall not be used
directly to heat conduit for bending purposes. The use of conduit
bends having factures and conduits with any wrinkles on formed
bends is not permitted.

Section 16130
Page 12 of 14
11. Concealed conduit and accessories shall be securely fixed before any
operations involving casting, concrete pourping, screed laying and
plastering. Fixing shall be by means purpose made clips which shall
not cause deformation of the conduit. Fixings shall be used at regular
intervals not exceeding 1.5 meters and the distance of clips on each
side of bends or accessories shall not exceed 150 mm.
12. A protective conductor of not less than 2.5 mm2 with green and
yellow insulation shall be installed throughout, sufficiently long to
allow looping in and of fittings and accessories. Where expansion
couplers are used allowance shall be made in the length of the
protective conductor to accommodate any expansion.
13. Where luminaries are to be connected to a ceiling conduit system,

metal conduit boxes shall be used. Fittings may not be hung from the
PVC conduit system and full details of the means of support shall be
shown on the Co-ordination and Builders Work Drawings.
14. Where a number of conduits converge, large adaptable PVC boxes

shall be employed to avoid the conduits crossing. Conduits shall be
connected to the boxes by means of male bushees and couplers.
15. Different coloures shall be applied for conduits of different systems.
I. Provide expansion-deflection fittings at expansion joints and on length of

runs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize
expansion-deflection fittings of size as required complete with bonding
jumper.
J. For Hazardous Locations
1. Utilize rigid steel only, unless otherwise noted.
2. Install approved sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive

vapors as required by the applicable electrical codes.
K. For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations
1. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor, where

conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as refrigerated
spaces, air conditioned spaces, or similar spaces.
A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, perform continuity tests by

testing the resistance of all feeder conduits from the service to the point of
their final distribution using 1 conductor return. Limit the maximum
resistance to 25 ohms. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning

Section 16130
Page 13 of 14
equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which
cannot be satisfactorily corrected, at no additional cost to the Owner.

Section 16130
Page 14 of 14
SECTION 16131
CABLE TRAY
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to

work of this Section.
C. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
Division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division
also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all
cable trays shall be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trays of

the types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years.

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to
cable trays. Provide cable trays products and components which have been
listed and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trays.
B. Samples:- Submit 30 cm length of each size of cable tray complete with its
accessories and fittings.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Cable Tray

Section 16131
Page 1 of 7
C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural
backgrounds of cable trays including, but not limited to, offsets and
connections. Show accurately scaled cable trays with locations of supports and
fittings, including fire stops and weather seals. Indicate relationship of cable
trays to other associated equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE TRAY
A. GENERAL
1. A complete cable support system with all required straight sections,

fittings, connectors and accessories.
2. All trays and system components as defined by and in conformance

with approved Standards or latest applicable revisions.
3. Cable Support System:
a) Exposed non-plenum rated areas; ladder type.
b) Plenum rated accessible ceilings; solid bottom type complete

with flange type solid cover.
c) Width as required or as shown on the drawings; radius of

fittings, 60cm minimum for wiring 95mm² and larger; 45cm
for wiring 70mm² and smaller or as shown on the drawings.
4. Fittings such as elbows, tees, crosses, etc., with a tangent, or straight

section beyond the curvature to accept one type of universal splice plate
to simplify field erections.
5. Usable Minimum Clear Loading Depth: 8 cm.
6. Straight Sections: 3.7 - 4 meters in length.
7. Cable Support System: Aluminum: 6063T6 alloy for extruded parts

and 5052 alloy for parts fabricated from sheet.
8. Cable trays shall be perforated type and manufactured from mild steel
and to be galvanized after fabrication the galvanization must be hot dip
galvanized.

Section 16131
Page 2 of 7
9. Minimum thickness of cable trays shall be 1.5 mm thickness for cable
tray 30 cm width and below and shall be 2mm thickness for 40 cm width
and above .
10. Cable trays shall be manufactured with plain return flanges
11. Adequate supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables where

they enter or leave the tray. Where cable trays extend transversely
through partitions and walls additional protection in the form of fire-
proof non-combustible barriers shall be provided.
12. All cables shall be fastened securely by purpose made straps or saddles
to the cable trays.
13. Cable trays shall be connected by means of flexible tinned straps to the
nearest bare earthing conductors and at maximum of 30 meters spacing.
14. Cable trays must be specially reinforced to have high loadbearing

capabilities across wide spans, maximum deflection should not exceed
0.5% in the longest span. Also it shall be mechanically designed to give
high torsional rigidity and good resistance against lateral loading.
15. Where the supported cables run in either a vertical or horizontal

direction, manufactured bends or sets shall be provided in order that a
continuous cable tray be provided throughout the length or run.
16. Bends in either vertical or horizontal directions should be dimensioned

such that cables may not be curved less than 15 times its diameter.
17. Perforate-type cable tray shall be used above the suspended ceiling. It
shall be manufactured from mild steel 2 mm thick, finished hot-dip
galvanized with a 20 mm return flange on both edges. Edge height 80
mm.
18. All components and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after
manufacture to give resistance to corrosion.
19. Same typical details of trays, ladder and perforated type are shown in the
drawings.
20. Cable tray width shall be chosen according to the number and diameter
of cables laid on the tray. all feeders and sub feeders shall be laid such
that their outer radius are spaced a distance equal to the diameter of the
largest cable.

Section 16131
Page 3 of 7
21. All Cable trays installed in mechanical rooms, all plenum rated areas,
parking areas, open space and on roof shall be covered with cover.
B. SAFETY FACTOR
1. Cable Tray at 2.5 meters Span: Capable of sustaining a working

(allowable) load of 68 kg per linear 30 cm with a safety factor of 2,
when tested as a simple beam and in accordance with approved load test
method; test specimen to be a single section of cable tray.
2. In addition to and concurrent with the above working load, a 90 kg

concentrated load applied at mid span to result in no permanent
deformation of the tray.
3. Design to be such that all like parts are interchangeable and that trays
may be readily assembled and joined without the use of special tools.
C. Fittings: at least the same thickness and cross sectional area of side members
and (rungs, bottom) as straight sections.
D. Connectors: High pressure rigid plate type connected by ribbed-neck or

square-neck plated steel bolts and free-spinning lock type nuts not requiring a
washer; ribbed-neck or square-neck portion of bolt to grip the tray side
member and connector plate metal to prevent bolt from rotating during
tightening of nut.
E. Where necessary, provide expansion guides and connectors per manufacturer's

thermal contraction and expansion table; install fixed hold down clamps
approximately midway between expansion connectors; install expansion
guides at all other support locations to allow thermally induced movement of
the tray.
F. Resistance of the connection between adjacent sections of cable trays: not

more than 0.00033 ohms; use bonding jumpers of suitable ampacity at all
expansion connections and at all adjustable points.
G. LADDER TYPE TRAY SECTIONS
1. Ladder-type cable tray shall be used to support heavy cabling as

indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The tray shall
be designed ladder-like, offering free circulation of air around cable
and minimum moisture and dust-gathering surfaces. Rungs shall be
welded to the ladder profiles. Rung width shall not be less than 30 mm,
and center distance between rungs shall not exceed 250 mm.

Section 16131
Page 4 of 7
Cables are to be prevented from falling down the ladder system by 50
mm height edges along the whole length of the ladder.
2. Rungs (transverse members) assembled to the side rails by welding to

insure integrity of fault ground path for the life of the system and
maximum structural capability; non-welded joining of rungs to side
rails are not acceptable.
3. Cable ladder shall be manufactured from hot dip mild steel and
galvanized after fabrication.
4. The ladder thickness should not be less than 1.5 mm.
5. Bearing Surface of Transverse Members: Minimum of 1.9 cm.

H. SOLID BOTTOM TRAY SECTIONS (PLENUM RATED AREAS ONLY)
1. Trays shall be of corrugated bottom to provide additional strength with

cable bearing surfaces 15cm on center. Tray sections shall be complete
with flange type flat covers.
I. LIGHT DUTY TRAYS
1. Aluminum with a maximum overall depth of 10 cm and a minimum

usable loading depth of 8 cm.
2. Capable of sustaining working (allowable) load of 36 kg per 30 cm on a

2.5 meter simple span.
3. Safety factor of 1.5 mid-span deflection not to exceed 1.25 cm.
4. Trough Type Trays:
a. Three piece construction consisting of two longitudinal members

(side rails) with a corrugated bottom welded to the side rails.
b. Peaks of the corrugated bottom with a minimum flat cable bearing

surface of 7 cm and spaced 15 cm on center.
c. To provide ventilation in the tray, the valleys of the corrugated

bottom to have 6 cm x 10 cm rectangular holes punched along the
width of the bottom.
J. All cable trays shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.

Section 16131
Page 5 of 7
As per recommended manufacturer's list
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which cable trays are to be installed. Notify

Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays and accessories as indicated in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards and
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trays work with other
work.
C. Install integral fire stops where cable trays penetrates fire-rated walls and
floors. Seal between cable trays and opening and around opening with
fire-rated sealant not less than wall, or floor, fire ratings.
D. At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around

cable trays and seal with non-combustible material.
E. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing (grounding) connections

for cable trays. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques
specified by manufacturers to assure permanent and effective connections and
grounds.
F. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure

enclosures are permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware
and accessories for proper mounting.
G. Route cable trays as required and make final field measurements before
ordering cable tray.
H. Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to

accommodate fittings directly connected, adjustable vertical connectors or
adjustable horizontal connectors with straight section in between may be used.

Section 16131
Page 6 of 7
Avoid slopes that would cause cable to bend on smaller radii; than that
allowed by cable manufacturer.
I. Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting
cable tray as required.
A. Prior to installing cables in cable trays, test for electrical continuity of

bonding, and earthing connections, and to demonstrate compliance with
earthing requirements.
B. Electrically energize cable tray systems and demonstrate functioning in

accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units,
and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot
be satisfactorily corrected.

Section 16131
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 16132
CABLE TRUNKING
PART 1: GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions
and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this Section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all cable trunking in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trunking of the

types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE,

IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to cable trunking Provide
cable trunking products and components which have been listed and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trunking.
B. Samples:- Submit 50cm length of cable trunking complete with its accessories and
fittings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of

cable trunking including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately
scaled cable trunking with locations of supports and fittings, including fire stops and
weather seals. Indicate spatial relationship of cable trunkings to other associated
equipment.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE TRUNKING
A. GENERAL
1. Trunking and connectors shall be manufactured generally in accordance with
Rev.01 August, 2018 Cable Trunking

Section 16132
Page 1 of 4
DIN/VDE or NEC
2. Trunking and connectors for internal use shall be finished with protection in
accordance with DIN/VDE or NEC.
3. Lengths of trunking shall be efficiently bonded to each other using strip copper
links not less than 12 mm wide x 1.5 mm thick and fixed with brass nuts, bolts and
asked serrated washers.
4. Lids shall be lipped and fixed at intervals not exceeding 1 meter by means of quick
release can fasteners. Steel screws and fasteners shall be protected against
corrosion by a finish at least equivalent to zinc coating to DIN/VDE or NEC.
5. Metal partitions in trunking shall be a minimum thickness of 1.2 mm and the finish
shall be of the same standard as the trunking. The method of fixing partitions to the
trunking shall not cause long term corrosion or electrolytic action and shall be such
that the partitions cannot be inadvertently displaced.
6. Connectors shall span the complete internal surface of the trunking and shall be
designed so that the trunking sections mate with butting joints.
7. Vertical trunking shall be supplied with a cable support unit with insulated pins at
intervals not exceeding 3 meters.
8. Horizontal trunking sizes exceeding 100 mm x 50 mm shall be supplied with cable

separators with insulated pins at intervals not exceeding 2 meters.
9. Trunking shall consist of base, snap-on covers, coupling end plates, wall flanges,
panel to trunking rubber grommet, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and all necessary
hangers supports and accessories.
10. Trunking shall be constructed of steel. All steel units shall be protected inside and
outside with a corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium, with a top coat of
enamel.
11. All trunkings parts shall be mechanically and electrically coupled while protecting
wires from abrasion.
B. Where any cutting or damage is caused during erection, the finish shall be made good.
All burrs and rough edges shall be removed. Where any corrosion has occurred it shall
be removed and the area treated with a rust- proofing agent. After this it shall be treated
by the application of either a zinc rich epoxy primer or equal alternative followed by a
coat of color matching paint.
C. Any fixing used for securing or fitting shall not cause any long term corrosion or
electrolytic action-black japanned fixing screws shall not be used. Where brackets are
used they shall be constructed of mild steel angle or channel iron finished to the same
standard as the trunking.
D. Connections to conduit, multiple box, switchgear and distribution boards shall be made

Section 16132
Page 2 of 4
with flanged units.
E. Where trunking crosses settlement and expansion joints a trunking joints shall be made.
The connector at this point shall be made with slotted fixing holes to permit a
movement of 10 mm in both the horizontal and vertical planes. The earth continuity
links across such joints shall be of braided copper tape not less than 15 mm wide x 2
mm thick having a resistance from fixing to fixing equal to or less than the links used
for the standard trunking joints.
The braid shall be long enough to allow for the maximum movement of the trunking.
The braid ends shall be folded, and sweated soiled.

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which cable trunkings are to be installed. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trunking and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trunking work with other

works.
C. Install integral fire stops where cable trunking penetrates fire-rated walls and floors.
Seal between cable trunking and opening and around opening with fire-rated sealant not
less than wall, or floor, fire ratings.
D. At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around cable
trunking and seal with non-combustible material.
E. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for cable trunking
Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified by manufacturers to
assure permanent and effective connections and grounds.
F. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are
permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper
mounting.

Section 16132
Page 3 of 4
G. Route cable trunking as required and make final field measurements before ordering
cable trunking.
H. Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to accommodate

fittings directly connected, adjustable vertical connectors or adjustable horizontal
connectors with straight section in between may be used. Avoid slopes that would cause
cable to bend on smaller radii; than that allowed by cable manufacturer.
I. Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting cable
trunking as required.
A. Prior to installing cables in cable trunking, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and
earthing connections, and to demonstrate compliance with grounding requirements.
B. Electrically energize cable trunking systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance

with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

Section 16132
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
Section.
D. The requirements of this section apply to wiring devices specified elsewhere in

these specifications.

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all
wiring devices in accordance with drawings and specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring

devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, and IEEE Standards pertaining to wiring
devices. Provide wiring devices which are DIN listed and labeled. Provide
device plates which are DIN listed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on wiring devices.
B. Samples : Submit samples of all wiring devices included in the contract.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Wiring Devices

Section 16140
Page 1 of 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Samples of all wiring devices detailed in this section and a choice of cover
plates shall be submitted to the Owner Authorized Representative for
approval/selection.
B. Wiring devices shall comply fully with the relevant European or International
Standards.
C. Each type of wiring devices where applicable shall be of the same manufacture
and where necessary of the same maker's catalogue number or description to
provide consistent appearance and finish.
D. Flush mounting wiring devices shall be fitted into purpose made metal boxes
only. All wiring devices shall be flush mounted except in plant rooms.
E. All boxes or sections of boxes for use with wiring devices must incorporate a
suitably marked earth terminal. Accessory plates shall be secured to boxes by
not less than two fixing screws. Where these screws do not provide adequate
earth continuity to metal plates or plates including parts to be earthen then a
bonding connection shall be provided from the earth terminal to the plate or
part. The bonding shall be protected with a green/yellow insulated sleeve. The
above requirement shall not apply to the earth socket on a socket outlet when
directly connected to a protective conductor.
F. All sockets and disconnect switches marked weather-proof shall not be less than
IP-55 for (indoor installation) and IP-67 for (outdoor installation)
G. Where more than one phase of a supply exists in a multi gang box the following
requirements shall apply :
A clearly visible label showing the maximum voltage present shall be arranged
as a warning notice before access can be gained to live parts.
Wiring and accessories connected to each phase shall be separated from each
other by fixed screens or barriers.
H. All faceplates for switches and sockets flush mounted type should be plastic
type.

Section 16140
Page 2 of 7
2.2 SWITCHES
A. All switches for lighting and associated circuits shall comply with BS or DIN
and shall be quick make and break for use on a.c. supplies. Switches shall be
single pole and rated not less than 10 A, 220 V for use only on a.c. systems,
including fluorescent or inductive loads to DIN/VDE or NEC standards.
B. Switches shall be one-way or two-way or intermediate or push button as

indicated on the drawings.
C. Switches for lighting shall be plastic plate switch type with rocker operation,
and in single or multi gang formation where installed in groups.
D. In damp, outside positions or where marked weather-proof switches shall be IP-

55 of non-tracking plastic, single pole, operated by external means. The switch
enclosure shall be metal housing
E. Push buttons single units or forming part of a multi gang unit shall be rated at
10 A, 220 V. The switch shall be single/double-pole and arranged for push to
make/ to break the contacts as applicable for the application.
F. All push buttons and switches located in corridors or stairs shall be illuminated
type.
2.3 SOCKET OUTLETS
Socket outlets shall be suitable to plugs generally available in Egypt used :
i. German standard 16A DIN 49400 (2 pin at 19 mm centers, earth at

top/bottom), with shutters.
ii. Industrial type switched sockets (3P+N+E) or (1P+N+E) as indicated on the

drawing shall be used in plant rooms, kitchens, workshops, etc. and shall be of
all rigid construction for surface mounting.
All sockets shall be provided with its matching plug.
2.4 DISCONNECTING SWITCHES FOR A/C & ANY OTHER (1-Φ) DEVICE /
EQUIPMENT
All disconnect switches for A/C shall be double pole with pilot lamp.
All disconnect switches for any other (1-Φ) device / equipment shall be double pole
with pilot lamp and flex outlet.

Section 16140
Page 3 of 7
2.5 ELECTRIC OUTLET UNITS
Outlet plates for cables or flexible cords shall be similar to switch plates and complete
with not less than two fixing screws. Terminals shall be provided to accommodate
incoming wiring and outgoing cables or flexible cord. The unit shall be unfused and
shall incorporate an outgoing cable clamp or cord grip. The cover plate of white
moulded plastic shall have a smooth aperture for the cable/flexible exit.
2.6 INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURES
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding, if applicable.
3. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests
4. Clean the unit.
following methods:

calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
manufacturer’s published data. In the absence of manufacturer’s
published data.
3. Perform thermo graphic survey.
6. Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, latching

mechanism, and mechanical operation.
7. Inspect insulating assemblies for evidence of physical damage or

contaminated surfaces.
8. Verify that fuse size and types are in accordance with drawings, short-
circuit studies, and coordination study.
9. Verify that each fuse holder has adequate mechanical support and
contact integrity.
10. Perform as-left tests.

Section 16140
Page 4 of 7
2. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a

low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground with switch closed and across each open pole for one
minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
3. Perform an over potential test on each pole, phase to ground with cutout
closed. Ground adjacent cutouts, if applicable. Test voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s published data. In the absence of
manufacturer’s published data.
4. Measure contact resistance across each cutout.
3. Test Values
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values should not exceed the high levels of
the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data. If
manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values, which
deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent
of the lowest value.
4. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

data.
5. The insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION

Section 16140
Page 5 of 7
A. Examine conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed. Notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other

work.
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess
building materials, dirt, and debris.
D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed and tested.
E. Install wall-plates after painting work is completed.
F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring
devices.
G. Protection of Wall-plates and Sockets upon installation of wall-plates and

sockets advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience
outlets. Prior to Owner accepting project, replace those items which have been
damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
H. Provide equipment earthing connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise

indicated.
I. Verify exact locations of switches and receptacles with architectural and interior
design drawings.
J. Install switches indicated on plans for the various rooms directly adjacent to the
entrance door and as shown on the approved shop drawings.
K. Check the architectural drawings for the door swings and locate all switches on
the lock side of the openings. Verify in field prior to switch outlet installation.
L. Coordinate all final mounting heights with Architect's elevations and details
prior to installation. Where heights are different than those indicated or
specified, the architectural heights take precedence.

Section 16140
Page 6 of 7
M. Where two or more switches control more than one 220 volt branch circuit,
barrier boxes to prevent 380 volts occurring in any one box.
N. Where more than one wiring device is mounted in the same location, gang
mount such devices una common face plate.
O. Vertically align devices shown above other on the drawings on a common

centerline unless shown otherwise.
P. Where an outlet is indicated as serving a specific piece of equipment, locate

outlet as required by equipment or layout roughing drawings. Work from
approved equipment and roughing shop drawings to locate outlets.
Q. Fully coordinate switched mounted in metal architectural frames, posts and

mullions with all trades involved. Submit method of wiring and type and style
switch to Architect for approval.
A. Upon completion of installation of wiring devices, prior to energizing circuitry,

test wiring devices for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. Ensure proper
polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring
devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Section 16140
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 16150
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1: GENERAL

Section.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all
miscellaneous control equipment shall be in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of miscellaneous

control equipment of the types and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide
miscellaneous control equipment produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to
miscellaneous control equipment. Provide miscellaneous control equipment
which have been listed and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for miscellaneous control equipment,

including sizes and types of enclosures, finishes, and electrical ratings and
characteristics.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTACTORS AND REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES
Rev.01 August, 2018 Miscellaneous Control Equipment

Section 16150
Page 1 of 4
A. GENERAL
1. Mechanically or magnetically held with contacts normally open or

normally closed and/or combination as indicated on drawings or required.
2. Rated for continuous operation with capacities and voltage at 50 Hz, as

indicated on drawings or required.
3. Spring loaded contacts to maintain contact pressure in closed position,

readily replaceable, self-aligning type.
4. Suitable for inductive or non-inductive loads, unless otherwise noted.
5. With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300
ampere.
6. Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
7. Operating coils voltage: 220 volts, unless otherwise noted.
8. Enclosure: Dead front, NEMA type, soundproof, with vibration isolation

mounting.
B. MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Single and/or dual coil operation.
2. Positive locking type without the use of latching hooks or magnets.
3. With a manual operator for hand operation giving positive indication of

contactor position.
4. Control Circuit: For 3-wire operation with momentary contact open/close

stations as indicated.
C. MAGNETICALLY HELD CONTACTORS
1. Spring assisted gravity open on normally open contacts and spring loaded
magnetically open in normally closed contacts.
2. Control Circuit: For 2-wire operation with maintained contact open/closed

stations as indicated or required.
2.2 MULTIPLE POLE RELAYS
A. Electrically operated, mechanically held type, with 10 amperes minimum rated

contacts.

Section 16150
Page 2 of 4
B. Open and close coils rated 220 volts or 380 volts, 50 Hz, unless otherwise
indicated or required.
C. Number of poles as indicated on drawings or schedules.
D. Enclosure: Industry Standards.
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. Rated as required for voltage, momentary volt-ampere load, continuous

volt-ampere load and suitable for the intended application.
B. With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in
accordance with the codes governing.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which miscellaneous control equipment are to be

installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install miscellaneous control equipment and accessories as indicated in

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable
Standards in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of miscellaneous control

equipment work with other work.
C. Protect miscellaneous control equipment systems from dirt, moisture and
construction debris subsequent to and during installation until project is accepted
by Owner.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
E. Mount all equipment in cabinets suitable for installation with all necessary bus
bars and terminal strips. Separate low and high voltage sections with barriers.

Section 16150
Page 3 of 4
F. Provide all wiring, conduit and accessories including but not limited to terminal
strips, rectifiers, switches, and fuses for systems to perform intended function.
G. Provide emergency shut-down facilities at mechanical equipment rooms and

other locations indicated on drawings and as required.
A. Prior to energization of installed miscellaneous control equipment, test for

electrical continuity of circuitry and for possible short circuits.
B. Electrically energize miscellaneous control equipment systems and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct
malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

Section 16150
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 16170
SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
Section.
D. The requirements of this section apply to safety and motor disconnects

specified elsewhere in the specification

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Engineer, all
safety and disconnect switches (fused and un-fused) in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of safety and motor

disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. Provide
safety and motor disconnects produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, BSEN, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to safety
and motor disconnects. Provide disconnect switches which have been listed
and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical

literature, installation, instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of safety
and motor disconnect switches.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Safety And Motor Isolators (Disconnects)
Section 16170
Page 1 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SAFETY AND MOTOR DISCONNECT
A. SWITCH INTERIOR
1. Switchblades fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.
2. Removable arc suppressor where necessary to permit easy access to

line side lugs.
3. Industry listed lugs for aluminum and/or copper cable and front
removable.
4. Plate all current carrying parts.
5. Provision for field installed fuse pullers.
6. Solid neutral where required
B. SWITCH MECHANISM
1. Heavy duty load break type 4 poles.
2. Rating: Voltage, poles, amperes, horsepower, and maximum available

fault current as required or shown on drawings.
3. Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism integral

with the box, not the cover.
4. Defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the

switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism
with the door open.
5. Handle position to indicate if switch is ON or OFF.
6. Provision for padlocking handle.
C. ENCLOSURE
1. Industry Standard except as otherwise noted or required, with multiple

knockouts on all sides and back.
2. Hinged door and cover.
3. Industry Standard for exterior installation.

Section 16170
Page 2 of 5
4. Industry Standard type most suitable for the environmental condition
of the area.
5. All disconnect switches marked weather-proof type should be nema

“type-4 “ (for indoor installation) and nema “type-4X” for (outdoor
and roof installation).
The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily limited to:-
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances.
3. Prior to cleaning the unit, perform as-found tests, if required.
4. Clean the unit.
5. Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and

mechanical operation.
6. Verify that fuse sizes and types are in accordance with drawings, short-
circuit studies, and coordination study.
7. Verify that each fuseholder has adequate mechanical support.
following methods:

calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
manufacturer's published data.
9. Test all interlocking systems for correct operation and sequencing.
10. Inspect insulating assemblies for evidence of physical damage or

contaminated surfaces.
11. Verify all indicating and control devices.
12. Lubrication requirements
1. Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.

Section 16170
Page 3 of 5
2. Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
3. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a

low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground with switch closed and across each open pole for one
minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data.
3. Measure contact-resistance across each switchblade and fuseholder.
4. Measure fuse resistance.
5. Verify heater operation.
6. Perform ground-fault test.
3. Test Values
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is
not available, investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or
similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Minimum insulation resistance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

published data.
5. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15
percent.
Refer To The Attached Manufacturer's List.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which safety and motor disconnects are to be

installed. Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
Section 16170
Page 4 of 5
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install safety and motor disconnect switches as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of safety and motor

disconnects with other work.
C. Protect disconnect switches from dirt, moisture and construction debris,

subsequent and during installation until project is accepted by Engineer’s
Representative.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws bolts and equipment

grounding connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and
controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide box with spare set of each size fuse used on project. Provide
nameplate on switch, indicating equipment served.
G. Install fuses in fused switches.
H. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a

permanent and effective ground, for electrical disconnect switches.
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches and after

circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Close all switches to check for proper energization of all loads.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.

Section 16170
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 16270
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of

this Section.
C. Wires and cables section 16120
D. Testing and commissioning, section 16950
E. Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and

Electrical Systems and related Contract Drawings, apply to this section of
the work.

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all wiring
devices in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

transformers of the types, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

IEC 60076, IEC 60137, IEC 60085, EN, NEC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE
Standards, pertaining to primary switchgear. Provide primary switchgear
products and components which have been UL listed and labeled.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes,

the more stringent provision will govern.
D. All distribution transformers shall be supplied as per the latest

EEA requirements.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Distribution Transformer

Section 16270
Page 1 of 14
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for transformer including, size

enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: submit dimensional layout on architectural background

drawings of primary switchgear, single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The transformer shall be cast resin and designed, manufactured,

constructed and tested in accordance with IEC 60076 latest editions as are
relevant, except where modified by this specification.
B. The electrical connections to other equipment shall be properly coordinated

to from a complete system (s) complying with this specification.
C. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer .These

drawings shall include fully dimensioned external and internal general
arrangements showing all principle dimensions, weights,
foundation/cable/busbar entry details and the positions of all functional
devices, schematic drawings showing all windings, method of connection,
terminal markings, and IP rating.
D. Transformers in the context of this Specification shall comprise assemblies
of a magnetic core, primary and secondary windings, supporting
framework and enclosure.
Unless otherwise specified all terse used shall comply with IEC 60076 and
DIN/VDE standards
E. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning and

subsequent maintenance of all equipment and materials described in this
specification shall comply with the requirements of, the electricity at work
regulations and the IEE wiring regulations.
Where more onerous requirements are specified herein, the conditions of

this specification shall take precedence.
2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
Cast Resin dry type transformer shall be used.
A. CORE CONSTRUCTION

Section 16270
Page 2 of 14
The transformer core shall be built of lamination, comprising grain
orientated silicon sheet steel which is insulated on both sides. To protect
the core against corrosion and improve noise levels the core assembly shall
be coated after assembly with resin based paint.
The lamination shall be clamped at top and bottom by steel channels, which
are interconnected by vertical steel bolts. The bottom steel channels shall
be used to support the transformer and the top steel channel shall
incorporate lifting lugs.
The bottom core clamping channels shall be bolted to supporting steel

cross-channels placed at 90o to the transformer length, such that the whole
unit is stable and able to support the whole weight of the transformer with a
safety factor of two. Wheels shall be fitted to the cross-channels which
shall be bi-directional or steerable.
The supporting cross-channels shall be insulated from the core-clamping

channels by anti-vibration pads.
The core-clamping and supporting steel work after all forming, drilling and
shaping operations shall be thoroughly digressed and rinsed prior to
application of a zinc phosphate primer, rinsed again and finally coated with
an oven baked epoxy paint.
B. COIL CONSTRUCTION
Each transformer shall be a double wound type with both the H.V. and L.V.
windings individually encapsulated in rigid steel mould. The coils shall be
impregnated with quartz filled epoxy resin and cast under vacuum, to
produce a smooth finish without voids and undulations.
The size and spacing of the conductors used in the windings shall be such
that the coils are self-supporting prior to impregnation and where
applicable, shall allow the epoxy resin to fill all of the space in and between
adjacent layers and turns.
The coefficients of expansion of the windings and epoxy resin shall not
differ by more than 15%.
The windings shall be made of copper or aluminum, utilizing round or

rectangular sections, or foil, as detailed in the attached schedule(s)
C. MECHANICAL FORCED VENTILATION (AF)
Where specified mechanical forced ventilation shall be employed to further

cool the transformer windings and thus increase the performance rating
during short highly loaded periods.

Section 16270
Page 3 of 14
The cooling system shall be automatically controlled by sensing the low
voltage top winding temperature.
The system shall comprise a number of single-inlet, single-width

centrifugal fans, each connected to a discharge duct situated directly below
the transformer coils, or axial fans, situated to direct the air flow through
the coils.
Duct work shall be of sheet metal construction to DW/142 low pressure

classification, or of greater thickness to suit manufacturing procedures, or
incorporated as part of the base frame construction if required.
Ducts shall have discharge outlets, protected with metal mesh screens to
exclude debris, to correspond with core positions on each side. Ends shall
be capped.
Fans shall have spigot inlets, with 6 mm protective wire guard, and flanges
outlets to connect to mating flanges on the air ducts, and joint to
incorporate a flexible gasket.
Fans shall be direct driven by an internally fitted external rotor type motor
with extended lubricators.
Each motor shall be supplied from a starter, complying with DIN/VDE

standards and shall be housed in a purpose-mad cabinet also
accommodating automatic control elements and status indication lamps.
The duty of each fan shall be identical and selected so that the total quantity
of air delivered is sufficient to maintain the transformer temperature within
the specified limits.
Fans shall be type tested to DIN/VDE Standards Impeller shall be mild

steel to DIN/VDE standards and of welded construction, shaft height
machined steel, bearings roller type or sealed for life. Fan scrolls shall be
of welded construction.
For shaft powers below 1kW stamped formed strip impellers may be used
provided required efficiency and balance grade can be achieved.
Where fan static pressure is less than 1kpa lock-formed joints and spot
welds may be used.
Fans and ductwork shall have a fully protective paint system to the same
standard as the core construction.

Section 16270
Page 4 of 14
D. INTERTURN INSULATION
High and low voltage coils shall be provided with very high integrity
interturn insulation to Class F, to withstand the thermal and mechanical
stresses under the specified operating conditions.
E. MOUNTING OF COILS
Coils shall be sandwiches between the core clamping channels but

separated from them by insulated support blocks. These blocks shall be
radially located top and firmly fixed to withstand vibration and absorb coil
expansions and contractions.
F. INSULATION CLASS
The insulation system for transformer shall comply with climate and fire
classes E2, C2 and F1 respectively and as per IEC 60076-11 / BS EN
50541-1.
G DEGREE OF PROTECTION
When specified, a transformer enclosure shall be designed to suit the

location and anticipated environmental conditions. This shall provide a
degree of protection not less than IP31 in compliance with IEC 529, and
shall comply with their Electricity at work Regulations.
H. TYPE OF RESIN, FILLER ETC
The particular manufacturer's insulation system shall dictate the type of

resin and filler but the following guidelines shall be complied with.
The resin shall ensure a minimum power frequency breakdown stress

10KV/mm when tested to IEC 243.
The completed cast resin coil shall be self-extinguishing in the event of

fire. The testing method shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
Type test certificates are required to confirm the above.
I. The transformer control panel shall transfer the data (Winding temperature,
statues for fans working/alarm/trip) to RMU-RTU (as specified in section
16330) & to local BMS.
J. PERFORMANCE
a. GENERAL
The transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 726 in respect
of partial discharge, impulse withstand short circuit strength.

Section 16270
Page 5 of 14
b. RATED VOLTAGE
Unless otherwise specified the rated voltage class of the primary windings
shall be 22KV and secondary windings 0.4KV or 6.6 KV, at a frequency of
50Hz. The windings shall be connected for vector group DYn 11.
c. THERMAL RATING
Transformers shall be designed and manufactured to operate continuously

o
at the nameplate rating, in an ambient temperature not exceeding 41 C and
RH not exceeding 85%, unless otherwise specified.
The manufacturer shall confirm any de-rating necessary, should the

transformers be required to operate in conditions exceeding those specified.
Transformers which are mechanically cooled shall have an increased

thermal range not less than 40% of the name plate rating.
d. LOSSES (low losses as per EEA requirements)
Losses at no-load and loaded conditions shall be the lowest achievable for
the transformer type specified. These losses shall be stated in the
schedule(s) which accompany this Specification.
e. NOISE LEVELS
The manufacturer shall confirm the guaranteed noise levels, Measurement

of sound levels shall comply with IEC 60076-10. The transformer shall be
provided with noise reduction support blocks in order to reduce noise level.
f. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Radiation of electromagnetic signals shall not exceed the limits of IEC

61000.
Where transformers may be vulnerable to voltage transients, they shall be
protected by surge suppressor, which will reduce transients below the
levels of the type tests.
2.03 HANDLING FACILITIES
A. LIFTING
Transformers shall be provided with permanently fitted lifting lugs or eye

bolts to facilitate handling by crane or hoist.
Transformers shall be equipped with jacking points to facilitate the removal

and or insulation pads.
Section 16270
Page 6 of 14
The bottom supporting steel work shall be fitted with holes or have lugs
attached for the attachment of hauling apparatus.
B. FRAME WHEELS
Transformers shall be designed for floor mounting and be provided with

removable bi-directional or steerable rollers.
The rollers shall be lockable or means provided to prevent movement of the

transformers after installation.
2.04 CONNECTION FACILITIES
A. CONNECTION METHODS
Connection methods shall comply with IEC 76-4. Provision shall be made
by the manufacturer for the mounting and connection of cable boxes and/or
busbars as specified for the HV and LV conductor connections.
Where HV and LV cable boxes and/or busbars are specified these shall
generally be arranged on opposite sides of the transformer. However exact
positions shall suit the specified requirements of each individual situation.
LV cable terminations shall be kept separate from the HV cable

connections and insulated to the specified voltage and able to withstand the
specified short circuit currents.
All HV coil interconnections shall be insulated for the specified voltage,

and able to withstand the specified short circuit currents.
An earthing terminal shall be provide at a convenient point on the

supporting steel work. All steel work shall be bonded to the earthing
terminal if it is not electrically continuous. Provision shall be made for
making an earth connection to the neutral of the LV windings, should this
be required.
B. TERMINAL MARKINGS
HV and LV winding terminals shall be clearly marked with characters in

accordance with IEC 76-4. The characters shall be stamped or engraved on
securely fixed, durable and non-corrodible plates.
2.05 TAP CHANGING FACILITIES
A. TAP CONNECTIONS AND LINKS

Section 16270
Page 7 of 14
Each transformer shall be provided with tapping on the HV winding to
cater for supply voltage variations in the range (+2x2.5% ) and (-4x2.5%)
in compliance with IEC 76-4.
Tap changing shall be effected by off-circuit tapping links.
A visible warning notice shall be fixed adjacent to the tapping links and
worded as follows:
" WARNING - OFF LOAD TAP CHANGING LINKS - ISOLATE

HV AND LV SUPPLIES TO TRANSFORMER BEFORE OPERATION"
2.06 THERMAL PROTECTION
Each transformer shall be provided with a system of thermal protection and

temperature monitoring.
Temperature sensing thermostats shall be mounted in each LV coil as close as

practicable to its hot spot. The thermostats shall be wired back to an electronic
controller fitted on the transformer.
The thermostats shall be used to indicate winding temperature, and provide alarm
and trip indications, and to operate forced cooling fans and trip HV circuit
breakers where specified. Volt-free contacts shall be provided for relaying
signals to remote equipment.
Wiring from the thermostats to the temperature controller shall be carried out
with single core copper cables to DIN/VDE standards with LEF insulation.
Cables shall be contained in galvanized steel conduit supported from the
transformer steel work.
The temperatures at which the cooling fans shall be switched on and off shall be
adjustable within preset limits.
The power supply for the cooling fans shall be provided from the particular
transformer via a suitably fused switch. This switch shall bear the inscription in
yellow letters on a black background:
" WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS -

DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
The starter assembly for the cooling the cooling fans shall comply with this
Specification. A warning label shall be fixed adjacent to the main isolating
switch bearing the inscription:

Section 16270
Page 8 of 14
"WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS -
DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
2.07 RATING PLATES
Rating plates shall be fitted complying with IEC 726.
2.08 TESTING INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING
The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to :
(i) Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition including evidence of

moisture and corona.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
4. Clean the unit.
5. Verify that control and alarm settings on temperature indicators

are as specified.
6. Verify that cooling fans operate.
7. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one

of the following methods:
1. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections

by calibrated torque-wrench method.
8. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as

recommended by manufacturer.
10. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified.
11. Verify the presence of surge arresters.

Section 16270
Page 9 of 14
(ii). Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with

a low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding and each winding

ground with test voltage. Calculate polarization index.
3. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance

with the test equipment manufacturer's published data.
4. Perform a power-factor or dissipation-factor tip-up test.
5. Perform turns-ratio tests at the designated tap position.
6. Perform an excitation-current test on each phase.
7. Measure the resistance of each winding at the designated position.
8. Measure core insulation-resistance at 500 volts dc if core is

insulated and if the core ground strap is removable.
9. Perform an over potential test on all high- and low-voltage

windings-to-ground. See ANSI/IEEE C57.12.91, Sections 10.2
and 10.9.
10. Verify correct secondary voltage phase and phase neutral after
energization and prior to loading.
(iii). Test Values
1. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar

connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with values specified

by manufacturer.
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels
of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer's published
data. If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values
which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent
of the lowest value.
4. Insulation-resistance test values at one minute should be in

accordance with manufacturer recommendation.
5. The polarization index shall be compared to previously obtained

results and should not be less than 1.0.

Section 16270
Page 10 of 14
6. Turns-ratio test results should not deviate more than one half
percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio.
7. CH and CL power-factor or dissipation-factor values will vary due

to support insulators and bus work utilized on dry transformers.
The following should be expected on CHL power factors:
Distribution transformers: 5.0 percent or less
Consult transformer manufacturers or test equipment

manufacturer's data for additional information.
8. Tip-up test watts loss values should indicate no significant

increase in power factor.
9. Temperature corrected winding-resistance test results should

compare within one percent of previously obtained results.
10. Typical excitation current test data pattern for three-legged core
transformer is two similar current readings and one lower current
reading.
11. Core insulation-resistance values should be comparable to
previously obtained results but not less than one megohm at 500
volts dc.
12. AC over potential test shall not exceed 65 percent of factory test
voltage for one minute duration.
DC over potential test shall not exceed 100 percent of the ac rms
test voltage specified in ANSI C57.12.91, Section 10.2 for one
minute duration. The insulation should withstand the over
potential test voltage applied.
E. SITE TESTS
All site tests shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification.
After delivery to site each transformer shall be inspected in the presence of

the Architect, prior to installation.
After installation on properly prepared foundations each transformer shall

be tested and inspected in the presence of the Architect.
The HV and LV winding connections shall be demonstrated as providing

the specified polarity and phase rotation and tap connections.

Section 16270
Page 11 of 14
The HV and LV windings shall be tested for continuity and insulation
resistance with a 1000v insulation tester. The insulation resistance between
adjacent windings shall not be less than 100 M ohm.
After the HV windings are energized, it shall be demonstrated that the

voltage and phase rotation at the LV terminals are as specified.
2.09 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENT - ACCESS
The specified transformers are located as indicated on the drawings.
This places restrictions on the transformers' physical dimensions in case it is

necessary to remove/replace a transformer once the installation is handed over
and in use.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the manufacturer's

transformer type selected could be removed/replaced (without incurring builders
work) with access through the proposed location.
Detailed dimensioned drawings proving removal/replacement and delivery route

plan being practical shall be provided.

Section 16270
Page 12 of 14
2.10 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
HV Supply system 22000V

. Number of phases 3 phase
. System neutral Not Applicable
. Fault level (nominal design) 750 MVA
LV Supply system
. No-load voltage 400 V
. Number of phases 3 Phase
. System neutral 4 Wire
. Rating As indicated on the drawings.
Supply frequency (HZ) 50 HZ
HV winding connection DELTA
LV winding connection STAR
Vector group reference DYn 11
HV Tapping (% of no-loads volts) (+2x2.5%) and (-4x2.5%)
Method of cooling Natural + Forced ventilation for 40%

extra rating.
Secondary voltage at:
. Full Load 380 V
. No Load 400 V
HV Insulation level 24KV

. Impulse KV peak 95 BIL
. Power frequency (KV RMS) 50 KV
Paint finish color Manufacturer Standard
HV conductor and type Top entry XLPE cables

LV conductor and type Top entry cables/bus bars
Indoor or outdoor Indoor - refer to layout

Installation/space limitations Drawing
coil material (HV) Aluminum
coil material (LV) Aluminum

Section 16270
Page 13 of 14
HV Supply system 22000V
. Number of phases 3 phase
. System neutral Not Applicable
. Fault level (nominal design) 750 MVA
LV Supply system
. No-load voltage 6600 V
. Number of phases 3 Phase
. System neutral 4 Wire
Supply frequency (HZ) 50 HZ
HV winding connection DELTA
LV winding connection STAR
Vector group reference DYn 11
HV Tapping (% of no-loads volts) (+2x2.5%) and (-4x2.5%)
Method of cooling Natural + Forced ventilation for 40%

extra rating.
Secondary voltage at:
. Full Load 6600 V
HV Insulation level 6.6KV

. Impulse KV peak 40 BIL
. Power frequency (KV RMS) 20 KV
Paint finish color Manufacturer Standard
HV conductor and type Top entry XLPE cables

LV conductor and type Top entry cables/bus bars
Indoor or outdoor Indoor - refer to layout

Installation/space limitations Drawing
coil material (HV) Aluminum

coil material (LV) Aluminum
Refer to the attached manufacturer's list.

Section 16270
Page 14 of 14
SECTION 16290
INSTRUMENTS AND METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
D. The requirements of this section apply to instruments and metering specified

necessary to complete and make ready for operation. Instrument and metering shall
be in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of instrument and

metering of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide instruments and
metering produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to instrument and metering.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for instrument and metering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 51, DIN/VDE standards
and shall be digital type.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Instruments And Metering

Section 16290
Page 1 of 8
2.2 INSTRUMENTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

All ammeters and voltmeters shall be digital type.
All instruments shall be flush mounted.
B. COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
1. STANDARD IEC 51
2. ADMISSIBLE OVER LOADS
a. Voltage : 1.2 rated voltage continuously 2 rated voltage for 2 seconds.
b. Current : - 2 In continuously.
- 10 In for 10 seconds.
- 40 In for 2 seconds.
3. DIELECTRIC STRENGTH : 2 KV. r.m.s. for 1 min.

o
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE : - 10 C to + 60 oC
5. RESPONSE TIME : < 15 seconds.
C. AMMETER AND VOLTMETER SWITCHES
On 3-phase, 4-wire system, ammeter switches shall have four operating positions,
marked 'R', 'Y', 'B' and 'N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single
ammeter to read, in sequence, the currents in each of the three phases and the
neutral wire, On 3-wire systems ammeter switches shall have three operating
positions marked 'R', 'Y' and 'B' and an 'OFF' position. Ammeter switches shall be
connected so that the associated current transformers are short-circuited when they
are not connected to the ammeter.
On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have six operating positions,
marked 'R-Y', 'Y-B', 'B-R', 'R-N', 'Y-N' 'B-N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall
enable the single voltmeter to read, in sequence, each of the three line voltages and
each of the three phase-to-neutral voltages. On 3-wire systems, voltmeter switches
shall have three operating positions marked 'R-Y', 'Y-B' and 'B-R' and an 'OFF'
position.
Voltmeter switches shall have 'break-before-make- contacts.
Contractor may also propose any selector switch means to latest NORM industrial
standard/manufacturer standard should digital equipment is used and submit
proposal and seek consent form Engineer.
Section 16290
Page 2 of 8
2.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTS)
All CTs shall comply with all relevant requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE standards
and shall have an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Tariff metering Accuracy Class Designation 0.5

Non-tariff metering Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter ammeters Accuracy Class Designation 3.0
Protection (overcurrent, UEF) Accuracy Class Designation 10p
Protection ( UEF) Accuracy Class Designation x
Unless otherwise specified in the schedules or drawings, the CTs are required for
use under service conditions not more onerous than those set out in IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
CTS shall be designed either for measurement or for protection and shall not be
used in a dual-purpose role serving both instruments and protective gear.
Unless otherwise specified, all CTs shall have 5A secondary windings.
So far as it is practicable, all CTs shall be of the ring type. Wound primary CTs will
only be accepted when the rated primary current is so low as to make the ring type
impracticable.
One side of the secondary of each CT shall be connected to earth at one point via a
bolted removable link.
For mattering circuits, either, a proprietary front of panel CT test block or special
"shorting" terminals within the panel shall be provided for test purposes.
All CTs whether of the ring type or the wound primary type, for use at voltages
exceeding 1000 V shall be epoxy resin encapsulated.
Where dual-ratio CTs are specified, they shall be provided with two separate
secondary windings capable of being connected in series or in parallel to give the
required ratio.
All CTs shall be provided with a rating plate bearing the information as stated in
IEC, DIN/VDE standards. All CTs shall be installed in accessible location. The
secondary connections shall be brought out by means of insulated leads, and made
off on a suitable terminal block-mounted in a readily accessible position.
Magnetization curves and/or type Test Certificates shall be provided for all CTs
associated with protection devices.

Section 16290
Page 3 of 8
Every CT shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden of the
instruments, relays, and/or other apparatus which it is to serve.
2.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be of the type, rating, and voltage ratio specified in the
schedules or drawings.
All voltage transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements of BS 3941
and shall have an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Metering Accuracy Class Designation 1.0

Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter voltmeters Accuracy Class Designation 3.0
Protection Accuracy Class Designation 3p
Unless other specified in the schedules or drawings, the voltage transformers are
required for use under service conditions not more than those set out in IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
Voltage transformers designed for a primary voltage not exceeding 4000 V shall be
the air insulated type, with the windings encapsulated in epoxy resin or other
suitable synthetic material.
Unless otherwise specified, all voltage transformers shall be designed for a

secondary output voltage of 110 V.
Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the
total burden of the apparatus or instruments which it is to serve.
The insulation resistance of each voltage transformer shall be indelibly marked on

the shipping/dispatch label.
2.5 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
The test to be carried out shall include but not necessarily to :-
3. Clean the unit.
following methods:

Section 16290
Page 4 of 8
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by

calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's
published data or Table 10.12.
c. Perform thermographic survey
5. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide contact.
6. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding

operation.
7. Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for voltage transformers.
a. Use appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
b. Use appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
2. Electrical Tests - Current Transformers

2. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and wiring-to-

ground at 1000 volts dc. For units with solid-state components, follow
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer.
4. Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method in

accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1. 1 (IEEE Guide for Field Testing of
Relaying Current Transformers).
5. Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications in

accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1. (IEEE Guide for Field Testing of
Relaying Current Transformers).
6. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals.
7. When applicable, perform insulation-resistance and dielectric withstand tests

on the primary winding with the secondary grounded.

Section 16290
Page 5 of 8
8. Verify that current circuits are grounded and have only one grounding point in
accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13.3 (IEEE Guide for the Grounding of
Instrument Transformer Secondary Circuits and Cases).
3. Electrical Tests - Voltage Transformers

2. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-

ground. Test voltages shall be applied for one minute. For units with solid-
state components, follow manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity marks or H1-
X1 relationship as applicable.
4. Perform a turn ratio test on all tap positions, if applicable.
5. Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals.
6. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the

secondary windings connected to ground. The test voltage shall be applied for
one minute.
Electrical Tests - Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformers
1. Perform all tests from 0.3 Voltage Transformers.
2. Measure capacitance of capacitor sections.
3. Measure power-factor or dissipation-factor in accordance with test equipment

Test Values
2. Bolt-torque levels
4. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.
5. Compare measured burdens to instrument transformer ratings.

Section 16290
Page 6 of 8
6. Ratio accuracies shall be within 0.5 percent of nameplate or manufacturer's
published data.
7. The insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
8. Capacitance of capacitor sections of coupling-capacitance voltage

transformers shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
9. Power-factor or dissipation-factor shall be in accordance with test equipment

2. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
3. Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, condition of spiral spring, disk clearance,
contacts, and case-shorting contacts, as applicable.
5. Clean the unit.
6. Verify freedom of movement, end play, and alignment of rotating disk(s).
2. Electrical Tests
1. Verify accuracy of meters at all cardinal points.
2. Calibrate meters in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
3. Verify all instrument multipliers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which instrument and metering are to be installed and
notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Section 16290
Page 7 of 8
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install instrument and metering as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practice to ensure that installation complies with requirements
and serves infection.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of instrument and metering.
A. Prior to energization of instrument and metering devices test devices for intended
function Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.

Section 16290
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 16320
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER KIOSK
PART 1- GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and apply to work of this section.
Section.
C. Primary medium voltage switchgear and ring main units section 16330.
D. Instruments and metering section 16290.
E. Low voltage air circuit breaker section 16490.
F. Miniature circuit breakers section 16491.
G. Moulded case circuit breaker section 16492.
H. Capacitor bank (Power factor correction) section 16496.
I. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
Division. The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also
apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all wiring devices in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transformers of

the types, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC

Standards, pertaining to 22 KV and 0.4 KV Distribution transformers
Rev.01 August, 2018 Distribution Transformer Kiosk

Section 16320
Page 1 of 5
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer’s data including, size enclosures concrete

base details, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: submit dimensional layout on architectural background

drawings of primary switchgear transformer, single-line diagram, and outline
drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 KIOSK SPECIFICATIONS:
A. The transformer substation kiosk shall be prefabricated with glass fiber

reinforced pollster (GRP) housing up to 24KV type tested according to IEC
62271-202 ed.2.0 standard.
The compact secondary substation (CSS) expected operating lifetime is 30
years under the specified environmental, climatic, system and service conditions
specified, with minimum maintenance requirements.
The power rating of the CSS will be defined as per the rating of the installed
transformer so different power rating of the CSS is available the (GRP) kiosk
shall be equipped with the following features:
- Type tested per latest IEC 62271-202 ed.2 and GB 17467-2010.

- Internal Arc Classification IAC-AB 20 kA, 1 second.
- High level of safety for equipment and personnel.
- All equipment inside CSS is type tested.
- Modular construction with compartmented design.
- Engineered footprint meeting required clearance standards.
- Engineered for smooth air flow and natural cooling.
- Oil collection pit underneath the transformer.
- Can be lifted with transformer installed.
- Locking system for all doors to prevent un-authorized entry of personnel.
- No access to live parts.

Section 16320
Page 2 of 5
B. The electrical connections to other equipment shall be properly coordinated to
from a complete system (s) complying with this specification.
C. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer. These drawings

shall include fully dimensioned external and internal general arrangements
showing all principle dimensions, weights, foundation /cable/busbar entry
details and the positions of all functional devices, schematic drawings showing
all windings, method of connection, terminal markings, and IP rating.
D. Transformers in the context of this specification shall comprise assemblies of a
magnetic core, primary and secondary windings, supporting framework and
enclosure.
Unless otherwise specified all terse used shall comply with IEC and DIN/VDE
standards
E. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning and

subsequent maintenance of all equipment and materials described in this
specification shall comply with the requirements of, the electricity at work
regulations and the IEE wiring regulations.
Where more onerous requirements are specified herein, the conditions of this
specification shall take precedence.
F. The kiosks should be designed and tested according to IEC 62271-202 and to be
complying with EEA requirements /specifications.
G. The kiosk are prefabricated metal-clad outdoor enclosures with compact

dimensions according to electricity authority requirements.
H. Sheet steel sections with weather-proof electrostatic coating, stone paint, alu-
zinc sheet steel.
I. Double roof system with natural air to facilitate the air circulation and support
the substation cooling system.
J. Valid for different types of distribution transformers.
K. The MV and LV compartments are arranged at both sides of the substations

with the transformer compartment in between.
L. The MV and LV compartments are provided with double doors. All doors are
equipped with stainless steel rigid hinges and rigid locking devices. Also all
doors are equipped with rubber gaskets to keep a high degree of protection.
M. All circuit arrangement can be provided with earth fault indicators.

Section 16320
Page 3 of 5
N. The transformer compartment is designed for a 3- phase dry type power
transformer.
O. The transformer is connected to the LV distribution board via copper busbars or

cables based on the transformer capacity, and to the MV equipment via XLPE
screened cables, each of the XLPE cables is equipped with two cable end box
for three single phase connection.
P. For service purposes, sufficient space is provided to the personnel to go in and

work freely, necessary opening are provided for air entry and exhaust, so that
the temp. Rise is kept to a minimum.
Q. Dust-rejecting ventilating louvers are situated at both ends of the transformer

compartment and dimensioned for self - cooling.
R. Two doors in both longitudinal sides of the transformer compartment provide

maximum flexibility to inspect and maintain the transformer.
S. The kiosk shall be provided with suitable way to connect security pad lock on
outside doors.
T. Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the on-off position of the switches.
U. The low voltage compartment shall have sliding button openings for exit of
outgoing feeder’s cables.
V. The panel’s doors shall be earthed with mean of copper conductor with cross
section area at least (6mm²).
W. The CSS shall be of glass reinforced polyester (GRP) construction, this applies
also to the roof, doors and ventilation louvers.
X. The design of the CSS shall be based on the safety to personal and equipment
during operation and maintenance, it shall be internal arc proof tested type(IAC-
AB) to the arc current levels(IAC AB,20 KA at 1 sec) to provide a high level of
personal safety to the general puplic and operators.
Y. The GRP enclosure material shall be inflammable as per IEC 62271-5.104.2

Section 16320
Page 4 of 5
2.2 KIOSK COMPONENTS:
A- Ring main units: as specified in section 16330
B- Dry type transformers: as specified in section 16270, rating as indicated on the

drawings.
C- Low voltage compartment & bus bars: as specified in sections: 16430, 16490,
16492, 16290, 16491, and 16496.
D- Remote Terminal Unit (RTU): as specified in section 16330.
2. 3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

Section 16320
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 16330
PRIMARY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS

& RING MAIN UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Conditions, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
C. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this
Section.
D. Electrical identification section 16075.
E. Wires and cables section 16120.
F. Testing and commissioning section 16950.
necessary to complete and make the switchgear ready for operation by the Owner
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgear of the

types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and
DIN/VDE, IEC 62271-200, IEC62271-100, BS, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI,
AND IEEE Standards pertaining to switchgear. Provide service entrance label and
applicable service entrance features per local code and NEC. Provide switchgear
products and components which have been UL listed and labeled.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Primary Medium Voltage Switchgear & Ring Main Units
Section 16330
Page 1 of 35
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for switchgear including sizes,

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings

of switchgear, single-line diagram, outline drawings, and relay coordination study
and short circuit current calculations analysis, for medium and low voltage
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer to The Attached Manufacturers' List.
2.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
A. The medium voltage switchgear shall be LSC2B-PM as specified under IEC-

62271, dead front, self-supporting structure, consists of line-ups of metal
enclosed, air-insulated and compartmented cubicles. Vacuum type circuit breakers
on draw-out trucks as indicated. The truck is fully interlocked with the interrupter
and the stationary cubicle. It is manually moved horizontally from the "Operating"
to the "Isolated/Test" position without the use of auxiliary equipment. A fully
isolated low-voltage compartment is integrated.
The switchgear cubicles and interrupters shall be factory assembled and type-
tested. All switchgear components should be provided according to the latest
Egyptian Electricity Authority requirements. Refer to one line diagram.
Provide no. (4) Cassette Trolley with each switchgear for ingress and egress of
circuit breakers.
B. The stationary part of the cubicles are built as a self-supporting structure, bolted
together from rolled steel sheets of at least 2.5 mm gauge, rated for 24 kV. Each
cubicle is to be divided into three sealed and isolated compartments by metallic
partitions, i.e., the bus bar, cable connection and circuit-breaker compartment. The
vertical partitions shall carry automatic, phase-segregated safety-shutters made of
metallic material. These shutters are to be sealed in both directions, effectively
preventing ionized gases from fault-arcs to spread to the neighboring
compartment. Each compartment shall have its own pressure-relief device.
Section 16330
Page 2 of 35
C. The interrupter truck shall carry vacuum circuit-breaker, with associated operating
mechanism and auxiliary devices. By manually moving the truck it may be
brought into a distinct operating and isolating test position. The front-shield of the
truck shall engage firmly with the frame of the cubicle when locked in the
operating position, and become an arc and pressure-proof part of the enclosure.
D. All protective relays, monitoring and control devices of a feeder shall be

accommodated in a metal-enclosed LV compartment on top of the MV enclosure.
Device mounting plates, cabling troughs, and the central LV terminal strip(s) shall
be located behind a separate lockable door fitted with a plexiglass window.
E. The busbars shall be rectangular, drawn from pure copper with cross section area
1250 A and shall be mounted on ribbed, cast-resin post insulators sized to take up
the Electro dynamic forces resulting from short-circuits.
All main busbars and droppers shall be isolated by heat shrinkable tubes and the
connection points with suitable isolated covers.
The busbar shall have the following specification:
- Rated voltage: 24 KV
- Frequency: 50 Hz
- Nominal operating voltage: 22 KV
- Power frequency withstand voltage at 50 Hz ~ 1 Min.: 50 KV
- Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 µs: 125 KV
- Short time withstand current KA, RMS, 3Sec: 25 KA
- Copper Purity not less than: 99.9 %
- Auxiliary voltage: 110 V.D.C 
20%
F. The entire switchgear and circuit breakers shall be rated to operate continuously
under full capacity in 45oC ambient temp. conditions & relative humidity 90%
non-condensing.
G. The switchgear degree of protection shall be (IP-41).
H. Line and load side primary disconnects shall have flat, spring-loaded and silver-
plated pressure contacts for low contact resistance and good ventilation.
I. Additional Safety Feature
Section 16330
Page 3 of 35
A series of sturdy mechanical interlocks shall force the operator into the only safe
operating sequence of the switchgear, preventing positively the following:
1. Moving the truck with the circuit-breaker closed.
2. Switching the circuit-breaker in any but the locked "Operating" or

"Disconnected/ Test" position.
3. Moving the truck into the operating position with the low voltage plug
disengaged.
4. Engaging the grounding switch with the truck in the "Operating" position, and
moving the truck into this position with the grounding switch engaged.
J. In the "Connected" and the "Disconnected/Test" position of the truck, the

switchgear shall be totally protected against contact with live parts with objects
larger than 1 mm in diameter.
K. The winding of the instrument transformers shall be made of copper. And the
current transformers for each cubicle shall be dry type and shall be short circuit
proof. The short circuit current capacity shall be at minimum of 25 K.A for 3 sec.
at rated voltage. They will have separate secondaries for metering. And protection
each with suitable burden, the current transformers should be interchangeable
from lower core to higher core from the secondary side of the current transformer
not from the primary side and they shall be single phase.
L. The switchgear parts shall comply with the relevant I.E.C. standards specification
regarding design, workmanship and testing :
 HV metal enclosed or metal clad switchgear I.E.C. 62271-200

 Common clauses for HV switchgear I.E.C. 60694
 Circuit breakers I.E.C. 62271-100
 Metering and protective C.T.'s I.E.C. 60044-1
 Metering and protective V.T.'s I.E.C. 60044-2
 Relays I.E.C. 60255,61000
 Reading instruments (ammeters, voltmeters). I.E.C. 62415,62229
Section 16330
Page 4 of 35
 Watt-hour meters I.E.C. 62052.
M. Precaution shall be taken at contacts between aluminum and other material to
avoid electrolytic action.
N. Structure shall be designed to enable the addition of future panels from both sides.
O. All circuit-breakers on the 24 kV switchgear shall be interchangeable.
Each incoming, outgoing feeder and bus-tie cubicle shall comprise circuit breaker.
The circuit breakers shall be vacuum type, mounted on withdrawable trucks, and
shall fulfill the following technical specifications:
Type vacuum
Rated voltage 24 KV
Nominal operating voltage 22 KV
Rated current:
- Incoming feeders: 1250 Amps
- Bus-tie: 1250 Amps
- Outgoing feeders: 1250 Amps
- Rated Breaking capacity KA: 25 KA, RMS
- Rated Making current capacity: 63 KA, Peak
- Rated operating sequence: O-0.3s-CO-3min.-CO
- Power frequency withstand voltage at 50 HZ ~ 1Min.: 50 KV
- Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50µS: 125 KV
- Short time withstand current KA, RMS, 3Sec: 25KA
The circuit breaker is equipped with closing spring charged by an electric motor
operated by 110 V DC.
It shall have two electric coils one for tripping and the other for closing. Circuit
breaker opening and closing can be done electrically by push button at low voltage
compartment and mechanically at the circuit breaker.
Operating spring can be manually charged too. It shall be equipped with a counter
to count the number of operations and an indication of this spring status.
P. The switchgear shall be constructed so that it corresponds to the degree of

protection IP 41 according to IEC publication No. 60529.
Section 16330
Page 5 of 35
Q. Each cubicle must be equipped with space heaters to prevent moisture & humidity
ingress (220 V x 2 x 100 W) one in cable compartment and the other in circuit
breaker compartment controlled by miniature breaker and by hygrostat.
R. All equipment (push buttons - indicating lamps - sockets and plugs – terminal
blocks for C.Ts & P.Ts and control …etc) must be made of hygroscopic and non-
flammable material.
S. The instruments shall be of flush type and mounted on hinged door at the front of
each cubicle.
T. The switchboard has to be designed to give maximum reliability and safety in

service concerning operation, inspection and maintenance.
U. The switchgear has to be designed to be safe against spread of fire, formation of

internal excessive pressure (each compartment shall have its own pressure relief
vent), contact of live parts, ingress of dust and splashing liquid.
V. Every incoming and outgoing feeder, cubicle shall be equipped with an earthing
switch.
W. When Vacuum circuit breakers are used, each incoming and outgoing circuit
breaker must be equipped with 3 No. distribution class surge arrestor.
X. The leakage path for fixing insulators and of P.Ts, C.Ts and surge arrestors should
be 2 cm/K.V or as per dimensions indicated in test certificate approved by
electricity holding company.
Y. The permissible (guaranteed) number of switching (On/Off) cycles at rated current

of C.Bs shall be >10000 cycle.
Z. The smart meters shall be supplied with their software and cables needed for
communicate it with any computers.
AA. Switchgear Arrangement:
The switchgear shall consist of the following panels:
1. Four (4) incoming feeder panels.

2. Ten (10) outgoing feeder panels.
3. One (1) panel sectionalizer.
4. One (1) panel adapter.
Section 16330
Page 6 of 35
The switchgear shall be of the totally enclosed indoor type, of size, rating and
arrangement as shown on drawings and indicated in the specification. The
complete assembly shall be floor mounted, free standing, with matching cases, to
form a continuous integral structure. The housing shall consist of folded sheet
steel sections welded together and shall be of robust construction. Switchgear
shall have front and rear access.
BB. Direct panel to panel busbar connection shall be made without the use of
interconnecting links.
The arrangement shall permit cables to enter from the bottom of the enclosure and
connect at their respective terminals without interference.
CC. Cable termination boxes shall be provided for incoming and outgoing feeders
having single core, XLPE insulated, Aluminum cables of 400 and 240 sq. mm.
cross sectional area.
AA. Facilities shall be provided for earthing the feeder side of the circuit breaker
without the use of loose attachments.
AB. Switchgear shall be extensible on either side.
Finish shall be battle-ship gray, "or any other color approved by Engineer",
vermin-proof and suitable for the climatic conditions of the site.
AC. Each switchgear unit shall be provided with a metal rating and name plate giving
the required particulars in accordance with the IEC recommendations.
AD. Instruments and smart meters shall be of the flush pattern with phenolic-black
finish digital type.
Relays shall be of the flush fixed pattern digital type.

Test terminal blocks shall be provided for all instruments, relays ...etc.
AE. Incoming Feeder Panels:
Shall be equipped with the following components:
1. One withdrawal, motor operated, vacuum type circuit breaker rated 1250A,
with 25 KA for 3 sec. short circuit breaking capacity.
2. One set of busbars rated 1250 A and designed to withstand electrodynamics

forces under worst short circuit conditions of 25 KA.
Section 16330
Page 7 of 35
3. Three current transformers with separate secondaries 10 VA class 0.5 for
metering (0.5M5) and 15 VA for protection class (5P10). Ratio as indicated on
the drawings.
Current transformers accuracy check calculation to be provided.
4. Three potential transformers each protected by H.R.C fuse for metering and
protection.
22000 110 110
Ratio 3 / 3 / 3
5. Indicator lamps (LED Type) (on-off-trip) – (red-green-yellow).
6. LED lamps for voltage presence (L1, L2, L3).
7. Smart Digital power meters V, A, PF, kW, KVAR, kWh, kVARh, max demand
with Modbus communication & the readings to be transmitted to SWG-RTU.
8. Two push buttons CLOSE and OPEN.
9. One position indicator for circuit breaker.
10. One position indicator for earthing switch
11. One flag relay with a reset push button and alarm for each of the following
(aux power loss – A.C loss – any M.C.B trip – protective relay trip).
12. One master horn for switchgear to give alarm during the following cases:
a. aux loss in any panel.

b. Protection relays trip.
c. Incoming feeder 24 K.V loss for any incoming panel.
d. Any M.C.B trip.
13. One microprocessor type digital protection and control relay equipped with
ethernet TCP/IP communication port with the following functions:
a. Three phase non-directional over current and short circuit (ANSI
50/51) (Three stages) relay with definite time delay characteristic.
b. Non-directional earth fault relay (ANSI 50N/51N) definite time
characteristics.
c. Three phase directional over current relay (ANSI 67).
Section 16330
Page 8 of 35
d. Directional relay for directional earth fault protection (ANSI 67N).
e. Three phase under/over voltage relays adjustable between (ANSI
27/59).
f. Relay characteristic must be coordinated with and approved by the
Electric Power Authority.
g. The protection relay shall also function as a communicating remote
terminal unit for its associated MV cubicle. the relay shall be
equipped with a digital I/O module for providing control and
obtaining status as per the following:
 close/open/trip of circuit breaker
 status of circuit breaker position (open/closed)
 status of circuit breaker truck (connected/disconnected)
 status of earthing switch (connected/disconnected)
 status of general alarm (aux power loss or trip signal)
 The protection relays shall also transmit all its measurement
readings (A, V, PF, kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh, maximum
demand, waveform capture) through communication bus to the
CCC & COC buildings.
14. Circuit breaker mechanism shall have an anti-pumping relay.
15. Earthing switch.
AF. Outgoing Feeder Panel:
Shall be equipped with the following components:
1. One withdrawable, motor operated, vacuum type circuit breaker rated 1250 A,
2. One set of insulated busbars rated 1250 Amps and designed to withstand
electrodynamics forces under worst short circuit conditions of 25 KA.

the drawings.
Current transformers accuracy check calculation to be provided.
ethernet TCP/IP communication port with the following functions:
a. Three phase non-directional over current and short circuit (ANSI 50/51)
(Three stages) relay with definite time delay characteristic.
Section 16330
Page 9 of 35
b. Non-directional earth fault relay (ANSI 50N/51N) definite time
characteristic.
c. Relay characteristic must be coordinated with and approved by the
d. The protection relay shall also function as a communicating remote
terminal unit for its associated cubicle. the relay shall be equipped with
a digital I/O module for providing control and obtaining status as per
the following:
readings (A, V, PF, kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh, maximum
demand, waveform capture) through communication bus
to the CCC & COC buildings.

metering (0.5M5) and protection class (5P10). Ratio as indicated on the
drawings.
Current transformers Accuracy check calculation to be provided.
7. Lamps for voltage phases (L1, L2, L3) (LED Type).
8. Smart Digital power meters V, A, PF, kW, KVAR, kWh, kVARh, max demand
with Modbus communication & the readings to be transmitted to SWG-RTU.
9. Circuit breaker mechanism shall have an anti- pumping relay.
11. Earthing switch.
12. Auxiliary relays.
13. Two push buttons on and off.
Section 16330
Page 10 of 35
16. One master flag relay with a reset push button and alarm for each of the
following (aux supply loss – A.C loss – any M.C.B trip – protective relay
trip).
AG. Bus Sectionalizer Cubicle:
Shall be equipped with the following components:-
1. One with drawable, motor operated, vacuum type circuit breaker rated 1250 A,
2. One set of insulated busbars rated 1250 A, and designed to withstand

electrodynamics forces under worst short circuit conditions of 25 KA.
3. Three ammeters (smart digital type) & transmit the signals to SWG-RTU.

the drawings.
Current transformers Accuracy check calculation to be provided.
Ethernet TCP/IP communication port with the following functions:
a. Three phase non-directional over current and short circuit (ANSI 50/51)
(Three stages) relay with definite time delay characteristic.
b. Non – directional earth fault relay (ANSI 50N/51N) definite time
characteristic.
c. Relay characteristic must be coordinated with and approved by the
d. The protection relay shall also function as a communicating remote
terminal unit for its associated cubicle. the relay shall be equipped with
a digital I/O module for providing control and obtaining status as per
the following:
Section 16330
Page 11 of 35
readings (A, maximum demand, waveform capture) through
communication bus to the CCC & COC buildings.
7. Automatic electrical interlock between the incoming & bus coupler circuit
breakers shall be provided as follows:
a. Bus tie circuit breaker is normally switched off while the incoming
feeders circuit breakers are switched on.
b. If the incoming feeder circuit breaker in any section is switched off, then
the bus tie circuit breaker can be switched on.
c. Mechanical interlocks to prevent the following faulty operations:

- Insertion or withdrawal of a closed CB
- Closing of breaker not locked in service or test position.
- Closing of earthing switch with breaker in service position.
- Breaker insertion with earthing switch closed.
- Breaker insertion with LV plug not connected.
8. Circuit breaker mechanism shall have an anti-pumping relay.
11. Auxiliary relays.

12. Two push buttons on and off.
15. One master flag relay with a reset push button and alarm for each of the
following (aux. power loss – A.C loss – any M.C.B trip – protective relay
trip).
16. Low voltage socket and plug.
Section 16330
Page 12 of 35
2.3 General Specifications for Smart Grid Switchgear Remote Terminal Unit (SWG-
RTU)
a. SWG-RTU shall be built on a modular flexible architecture.

b. The SWG-RTU shall be organised with a main communication unit that supports
communication with the remote control centre, communication with devices
located in the switchgears.
c. A power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery and battery charger feeds from
220 V A.C for the communication transmission systems, the battery AH shall be as
per the manufactures standard & recommendation.
d. The battery shall be able to withstand ambient temperature 50 C.
e. The SWG-RTU shall be expandable by adding modules, the number of modules

shall not be limited and not based on a rack design.
f. The SWG-RTU shall be configurable locally or/and remotely.
g. A configuration tool, based on PC, shall be provided for configuration of the
SWG-RTU. This tool shall be connected locally or remotely to download and
upload the configuration.
h. A web server shall be integrated into the SWG-RTU communication unit and shall
provide facilities for maintenance, settings including cyber security settings, and
historical logs display. This Web server shall be accessible locally and remotely,
by mean of a standard laptop PC. Locally the maintenance tool shall be connected
to the SWG-RTU by a Wi-Fi or Ethernet communication port.
i. The firmware shall be updated either locally or from the central system.
2.4 SWG-RTU Control and Monitoring Functions

The SWG-RTU shall connect via Ethernet to each medium voltage switchgear digital
protection and control relay. Each digital protection and control relay shall act as a
standalone measuring and control RTU for its associated MV cubicle.
The interface with Each MV cubicle shall provide at least:

- Circuit breaker status (closed/open) must be dual input
- Earth switch position (closed/open) must be dual input
- Circuit breaker control (close/open) must be dual output
- Circuit breaker truck position (connected/disconnected)
- All protection and measurement functions offered by the protection relay
Section 16330
Page 13 of 35
- All waveform capture performed by the protection relay
2.5. SWG-RTU Archives function

a. Events and measurement shall be archived in logs.
b. Events shall be stored in the archive logs with a time resolution of 1ms, and a
discrimination of 10ms.
c. The capacity of the logs shall be up to 500,000 events and measurement.
d. All the logs shall be available from a maintenance tool connected to the SWG-RTU
or sent on request to the Remote Control Centre.
2.6 SWG-RTU Communication
a. Communication with Remote ADMS

The SWG-RTU shall be able to communicate with the ADMS on 2 channels. In case
of redundancy the ADMS will activate the backup communication channel. The SWG-
RTU shall be able to initiate also a communication on the backup channel in case of
detection of inactivity on the main channel.
b. Protocol
The SWG-RTU shall comply with IEC 870-5-104 IEC 870-5-101 DNP3.0 standard
protocol. The RTU shall support Secure Authentication according to IEC 62351-5.
c. Transmission
The communication system is based on optical fiber. The SWG-RTU power supply
shall be sized to supply the communication modem.
d. Communication LAN for Digital protection relays of the MV switchgear

The SWG-RTU shall be able to provide communication ports:
- Ethernet port
- RS232/RS485 port
e. Cyber Security
e.1. In order to secure all controls and data acquisition, the SWG-RTU shall be
designed to be compliant with NERC and IEC62351 requirements. The SWG-RTU
shall support secure access based on RBAC, with the possibility to configure the roles.
e.2. Local and remote access connection shall be secured for maintenance (locally and
remotely) with HTTPS, SFTP, IPSEC and SSH protocols.
Authentication shall be based on a Radius server.
Section 16330
Page 14 of 35
- SWG-RTU shall support remote firmware updates.
- Compatible with a full centralised RBAC management in compliance with
IEC 62351-9.
- Device hardening.
- Disabled or unused functionality shall not compromise security.
- Unnecessary services and programs shall be removed. If removal is not
possible, the unnecessary services and programs shall be disabled.
e.3. Interface minimization

- Each interface shall support only the data types and protocols needed to
meet the functional requirements.
- Unused interfaces and ports shall be removed. If removal is not possible,
the unused interfaces and ports shall be disabled.
- A complete list of supported data types and supported communication
protocols per interface shall be provided.
- All hardware interfaces that are used for programming or debugging shall
be completely removed after production.
e.4. Account hardening
- The SWG-RTU shall not contain active default, guest and anonymous
accounts.
- All remote access to root accounts on the SWG-RTU shall be disabled.
- All Vendor-owned accounts where feasible shall be removed.
- The list of all accounts on the SWG-RTU shall be provided.
e.5. Communication
The SWG-RTU shall comply to security standards
The RTU shall follow the IEC 62351 standards and at least:
- IEC 62351-5 : 2013
- IEC 62351-8
e.6. Communication security
The RTU shall support network and transport layer encryption using IPSec.
e.7. Management of Security passwords
- The SWG-RTU service application shall support individual user passwords.
- Passwords shall be stored together with a salt using an allowed cryptographic
hash function.
- The RTU service application shall enforce a high complexity of passwords.
- The RTU shall lock the access after several password error.
Section 16330
Page 15 of 35
e.8 User Authentication
- The RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the WAN interface using
a challenge-response protocol based on message authentication codes The RTU
shall terminate the connection if the user authentication fails.
- The RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the Local Maintenance
interface.
- It shall be possible to configure the SWG-RTU so that it blocks authentication
requests, either temporarily or permanently, from an account after a number of
failed login attempts. The number of failed login attempts and the time the account
is blocked shall be configurable.
e.9. Security testing

- The SWG-RTU shall comply with ACHILLE Level1.
2.3 EQUIPMENT DATA
Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not be
limited to the following:
Construction and installation details for the 24KV primary medium voltage
switchgear equipment.
Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of cubicles.
Details of connection of high voltage cables to the cubicles.
Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
Key interlocking scheme showing key numbers and operations performed.

The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this
section shall include but not be limited to the following :
Complete technical data on the 24kV primary medium voltage switchgear

equipment.
including data on operating characteristics, compliance with standards, dimensions
and weights, detailed description, operating mechanism etc.
Complete technical data on instruments protective and auxiliary relays, measuring
instruments including manufacturer's catalogues, operating characteristics,
operating curves, for fuses detailed description.
Section 16330
Page 16 of 35
2.4 TESTS
A. Supply test results to confirm that the switchgear have been tested to substantiate
designs according to applicable Standards verifying not only the performance of the
switch but also the suitability of the enclosure venting, rigidity and bus bracing. In
addition, factory test each switch in accordance with approved Standards.
B. All tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at works and at his expense and
under control and supervision of EEHC.
C. The contractor is responsible for testing all medium voltage switchgear and all
protection equipments, …etc. as per EEHC requirements on his expenses.
2.5 BATTERY
A. Battery characteristics:
1. Type Nickal-cadium type

2. Number of cells 95
3. Rated voltage 110V
4. Rated voltage per cell 1.2V
5. Rated capacity 100AH based on five hours discharge
6. Electrolyte potassium hydroxide solution
B. General specification for battery set:
1. The battery shall be able to withstand full charging and discharging

currents at an electrolyte temp. Up to 50 C.
2. Battery completely charged shall act as stand by dc supply in a floating

condition, parallel to a battery charger and the distributor supplying DC
current.
3. Battery shall be delivered empty and can be stored for a long period under
specified conditions without affecting final application requirements.
4. Cell containers made of polypropylene should be submitted as main offer

and of stainless steel as an alternative offer.
5. All the accessories, such as bolts, washers and links necessary for
connecting cells series should be delivered.
Section 16330
Page 17 of 35
6. The battery shall be delivered complete with the mounting racks.
7. Each battery shall be provided with a voltmeter to measure the cell voltage,
a hydrometer to measure the specific gravity of the electrolyte, the
necessary copper connections and the necessary quantity of the hydroxides
(potassium hydroxide lithium hydroxide).
8. Specifications for potassium hydroxide which is used in the alkaline

batteries:
a. Hydroxide computed as KOH min. 96 %
b. Carbonate computed as K2CO2 max. 2.5 %
c. Chlorides computed as CL max 0.75 %
d. Sulfates max as in traces
e. Composition of iron computed as Fe max. 0.005 %
2.6 AUTOMATIC FLOAT BATTERY CHARGER
A. The battery charger shall have nominal voltage 110 V DC. It will be three-
phase bridge-connected. The bridge consists of three silicon controlled rectifier
(SCR) and three diode. It will have float charging and high rate charging
regimes operating on the principle of constant voltage output. The charger must
have the possibility of both manual and automatic switching – over from one
regime to the other one depending on the state of battery bank. The charger
shall soft start features.
B. The output voltage, at any regime, must be adjustable and stable within the
specified range when output current is varied form 0 % to 100 % of its rated
value, AC supply voltage and/or frequency fluctuate within the specified
ranges.
The charger output current be automatically limited to the specified value.

(according to standard specification VDE No. 41773).
C. A control unit must be added so that the load supply voltage is regulated 110 
5% V DC independent on the charger output without any instantaneous
interruption of load supply.
D. The charger must be equipped with a DC voltage regulating unit for feeding the
control, signal and protection circuits of medium voltage switch-board within
the specified voltage range at either battery float or high rate charging regime.
Section 16330
Page 18 of 35
E. The charger is to be equipped on all sides (input and outputs) with miniature
circuit-breakers having thermal and magnetic releases on all poles and with the
following specification:
a. AC supply side (AC, 3 phase) 16 A

b. Breaking current 10 KA
c. Battery side (DC) 30 A
d. Load side (DC) 32 A
F. The charger shall have the specification:
a. AC supply voltage 3-phase 50c/s, 380 + 10%-15%

b. Output DC voltage :
1. Float charging 90 to 135 (to be set at 128.8 V).

2. High-rate charging 90 to 160 (to be set at 147.2 V).
3. Load voltage 110  5%
4. Charger output current 10 A - 30 A
adjustable range
c. Output DC voltage :
static stability  1 % at variation of :

* Output DC current from 0% to
100% of its nominal value (30 A)
* Input AC voltage from 85% to
110% of its nominal value (380
V)
* Nominal frequency by  6%
d. Long term stability 0.15% of nominal DC output
voltage per 1000 hrs.
e. Ripple voltage :
1. Battery connected  1% rms of nominal output DC
voltage
2. Battery not connected 5% rms of nominal output DC
voltage
f. Insulation level  2 KV AC for one minute between
input/output and earth
g. Insulation resistance  10 M.ohm with 500 V DC
between input/output and earth
h. Noise level Not more than 65 dB
Section 16330
Page 19 of 35
G. The output DC voltage of the charger shall not be affected by reversing of the
phase sequence.
H. The charger is to be connected permanently in parallel with battery bank and

feeding at the same time the DC load.
I. The charger shall be equipped with the following protection, control,

indication, alarm and metering devices.
J. Battery charger protection
a. AC side
1. Phase(s) failure
2. over voltage & under voltage
3. Input CB (provided with over load and short circuit protection)
4. Varistors (AC surge suppression)
b. DC side
1. Over voltage charger output
2. Over current (battery charging current)
3. Reverse polarity
4. Two output circuit-breakers one for load, other for battery charging
(provided with over current and short circuit protection)
5. Under voltage on battery side
c. Charger side
1. Surge (spikes) suppressors

2. Electronic current limit (charger output)
3. Semi-conductor fuses for thyristors
4. Blocking diodes, to prevent battery discharge in case of bridge
failure
d. Trip actions
1. Battery charging over current

2. AC malfunction (phase failure, under voltage and over voltage)
Section 16330
Page 20 of 35
e. Alarm actions
1. Low voltage (under voltage on battery)

2. Charger failure
3. Circuit breaker trip
f. Control
1. On/off switch
2. Mode selector
- Manual : float and high-rate

- Automatic : float and high-rate
3. Setting for all parameters
- Max. charging current

- Float charging voltage
- High-rate charging voltage
4. Alarm acknowledgment & reset & test
g. Metering and indication
1. Two DC voltmerters (one for battery, one for

load)
2. AC voltmeter with selector switch
3. Two ammeters (one for battery, one for load)
4. Charging failure (red light) and free contact for remote alarm
5. AC circuit breaker trip (light)
6. Light for each operating mode (float/high-rate)
7. DC earth fault
2.7 DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
A. It shall be of metal enclosed type and comprise all the necessary control switches
and measuring instuments. It shall be furnished with necessary protective and
signaling devices.
Section 16330
Page 21 of 35
2.8 SMART GRID RING MAIN UNITS (Type-A and Type-B)
A. Regarding Smart Grid distribution network, There shall be two types of RMUs
a. Type-A RMU: Monitoring Only
b. Type-B RMU: Monitoring and Control
B. The following specifications is common to both types of RMUs
C. Ring main unit GIS Type with service continuity LSC2-PM according to IEC62271
feeding each transformer comprises two (2) or three (3) numbers of three-pole load
break switches rated 630 Amps, 24 KV for the incoming / link / outgoing feeders
cables and one (1) three-pole fusible load breaker switch and tripping if one fuse
blows to protect the transformer, at 24KV for the outgoing cable connected to the
transformer as indicated on the drawings.
D. Ring main unit feeding the auxiliary transformer of MV switchgear comprises three
(3) numbers of three-pole load break switches rated 630 Amps, 24KV two for the
incoming ring main feeders cables and one (1) load break switch with fuse for the
outgoing cable connected to the auxiliary transformer.
E. The RMU and busbar shall all be contained in a stainless steel enclosure filled with
SF6 at maximum 0.3 bar relative pressure to ensure the insulation and breaking
functions. This compartment is a sealed pressure system, in accordance with the
IEC 62271-1 standard, with a service life time of 30 years. In addition. No refilling
of the gas shall be required during the whole service life time.
F. It shall provide full insulation, making the switchgear insensitive to the

environment (temporary flooding, high humidity...). Assembled, the active parts of
the switchgear shall be maintenance-free.
G. The tank shall be made of ≥2 mm AISI 304 unpainted stainless steel and be able to
withstand an accidental internal overpressure of ≥ 2.1 bars (relative).
H. The switchboards shall be designed so as to prevent access to all live parts during
operation without the use of tools.
I. MV Cable connection bushings shall be accessible from the front of the RMU. The
bushings should be conveniently located for working with cables specified and
allow the termination of these cables in accordance with the instructions supplied.
The profiles of the cable connection bushings shall be in compliance with EN
50181 standard.
Section 16330
Page 22 of 35
J. Transformer protection feeder shall be used by a LBS switch-fuse combination
K. The switches in switch-fuse combination shall be of the maintenance-free, low

pressure SF6 gas type. The position of the contacts shall be clearly visible on the
front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide positive contact
indication in accordance with IEC 62271-102 standard .
L. The switches shall have 3 positions, open-disconnected, closed and earthed, and
will be constructed in such a way that natural interlocking prevents unauthorized
operations.
M. An operating mechanism can be used to manually close the switch and charge the
mechanism in a single movement.
N. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an integrated push
button.
O. Fuses shall be installed in 3 individual sealed chambers metalized on the outside

and detachable. They shall be mounted in series with the switch with the following
operating mode: blowing of a fuse releases a striker pin which causes three-phase
opening of the switch and prevents reclosing. The fuse chamber shall be able to be
changed when needed.
P. Cable termination boxes shall be provided for the incoming and outgoing.
Q. They shall be GIS ring main unit of 3 pole gang operated type capable of
interrupting safely, their nominal full load current.
R. The switch-fuse disconnector shall have the following rating :
1. Nominal voltage 22 KV.

2. Maximum operating voltage 24 kV.
3. Rated current 630 A.
4. Rated withstand voltage, 1 min 50 KV
5. BIL between phase and earth 125 KV
6. Rated short time current 3 S 20 KA
7. Peak withstand current 50 KA
S. The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles through levers.
Protective barriers must be provided to safeguard the personnel from unintential
contact with the live parts during switching operations.
Section 16330
Page 23 of 35
Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the ON/OFF positions of the switches and
the hand-operated handles shall be provided with locks, where required.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working on
cables.
T. Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders’ side to enable earthing the
cable feeders when working on the cables.
U. Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant earth
switches such that no load break switch can be switched on as long as his mate
earth switch is in the ON position and vice versa.
V. Ring main unit must be equipped with earth fault indicators as indicated on the
drawings of the type and according to the Egyptian Electricity Authority
requirements.
W. Outgoing feeder panel will be as indicated on the drawing.
X. The degree of protection shall be IP65.
Y. The sheet steel thickness shall be (2.5 mm).
Z. All load break switches installed in (Type – B) RMU’S shall be motorized type.
2.9 Voltage Presence Indicators (VPI)
a. Each RMU function shall be equipped with a Voltage Presence Indicator (VPI) on
the front cover to indicate whether there is voltage in the cables.
b. The voltage indicator shall be in compliance with IEC 62271-206 standard.
c. Cable connection bushings shall be equipped with capacitive dividers that will
supply low voltage power to the voltage presence lamps.
d. The lamps shall be of high performance LED technology to insure high visibility
and long life duration. Three voltage sensing inlets shall be provided on each
function to allow checking the phase concordance.
e. It shall be possible to replace the voltage presence indicator while unit remains
energized, guaranteeing the safety of people.
2.10 Communicating Fault Passage indicator with integral voltage detector FPIVD
a. Each of the two Incoming Load break switches shall be equipped with a fault
passage indicator with integral voltage detection device (FPIVD).
Section 16330
Page 24 of 35
b. The voltage signal shall be taken from the Voltage Presence Indicator (VPI)
connected to capacitive divider in each load break switch cable bushing.
c. The voltage detection device shall display the MV network voltage in percentage
of the network service voltage. It is not allowed to use a voltage measuring tool to
calibrate the device
d. The fault passage indicator function is used to detect and localise the faulty part of
the network.
e. It shall indicate short circuit and earth faults with a high performance red LED on
the front panel.
f. It shall indicate permanently the load currents of each phase and memorise the
maximeters of each phase.
g. It shall indicate both phase-to -phase and phase-to earth faults.
h. In order to guarantee a fault validation on cable with low load value, a validation
by voltage presence shall be provided.
i. It shall be equipped with both automatic and manual setting modes.
j. It shall be dual powered device such that the FPI function is self-powered however
the communication function shall be with external power supply used for the
communication RTU.
k. It shall provide an output for external lamp gathering short circuit and earth fault
remote indication as well as a relay or transistor output for ADMS interface.
l. The current sensors shall be mounted onto the RMU bushing
m. it shall be communicating using Modbus protocol to the RTU
n. It shall indicate permanently that it is in operation, it could be by means of the
permanent load indication.
2.11 General Specifications for RMU Remote Terminal Unit (RMU-RTU)

For
 RTU-RMU (Type-A)
 RTU-RMU (Type-B)
a. RMU-RTU shall be built on a modular flexible architecture.

b. The RTU shall be organised with a main communication unit that supports
communication with the remote control centre, communication with devices
located in the substations and communication with interfaces with the switchgears.
c. One interface and treatment unit per Load break switch in the substation.
d. A power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery charger and provides 48Vdc for
the motorisation, 12Vdc for the electronic devices and 12Vdc for the
communication transmission systems, the battery AH shall be as per the
manufactures standard & recommendation.
Section 16330
Page 25 of 35
e. The RMU-RTU shall be expandable by adding modules, the number of modules
shall not be limited and not based on a rack design.
f. The RMU-RTU consumption shall be limited to 10W per substation.
g. The RMU-RTU shall be configurable locally or/and remotely.
h. A configuration tool, based on PC, shall be provided for configuration of the
RMU-RTU. This tool shall be connected locally or remotely to download and
upload the configuration.
i. A web server shall be integrated into the RMU-RTU communication unit and shall
provide facilities for maintenance, settings including cyber security settings, and
historical logs display. This Web server shall be accessible locally and remotely,
by mean of a standard laptop PC. Locally the maintenance tool shall be connected
to the RMU-RTU by Ethernet communication port.
j. The firmware shall be updated either locally or from the central system.
2.12 RMU-RTU Control and Monitoring Functions:
a- Particular requirements for RMU(Type-A) Monitoring only:

Each medium voltage switchgear in the substation shall be monitored.
The interface with the RMU shall provide at least:
- Switch position (Dual input)
- Earth switch position (single or dual input)
- Voltage presence (via communication)
- Fault passage indication alarm (via communication)
- Signals from transformer (winding temperature, status for fans
working/alarm/trip).
- Signals from all low voltage circuit breakers, smart meters.
- All monitoring data shall be transmitted to CCC & COC buildings via the
communication cables.
b- Particular requirements for RMU(Type-B) Monitoring and control

Each medium voltage switchgear in the substation shall be monitored and controlled
by an interface and treatment unit. It shall be possible to extend the number of
monitored and controlled switchgears by adding one interface modules per switchgear.
The interface with the RMU shall provide at least:
- two incoming Switch position (Dual input)
- Earth switch position (single input)
- Voltage presence (via communication)
- Fault passage indication alarm (via communication)
- Signals from transformer (winding temperature, status for fans
working/alarm/trip).
- Signals from all low voltage circuit breakers, smart meters.
- Incomings LBS’s motor control (each LBS must have its dedicated control
module).
Section 16330
Page 26 of 35
- In addition to these direct interfaces with the RMU, the number of operations
shall be transmitted to the ADMS
- The interface shall control the switch motorisation through a dual output which
provides the 48Vdc voltage to the interface relay located into the switchgear.
- The control operation shall be secured by a select before execute procedure, the
48Vdc power supply to the motor shall be activated only during the execute
phase.
- All monitoring data shall be transmitted to CCC & COC buildings via the
communication cables.
2.13 Archives
Events and measurement shall be archived in logs.
Events shall be stored in the archive logs with a time resolution of 1ms, and a
discrimination of 10ms.
The capacity of the logs shall be up to 500,000 events and measurement
All the logs shall be available from a maintenance tool connected to the RTU or sent
on request to the Remote Control Centre.
2.14. Communication
2.14.1. Communication with ADMS

The RTU shall be able to communicate with the ADMS on 2 channels. In case of
redundancy the ADMS will activate the backup communication channel. The RTU
shall be able to initiate also a communication on the backup channel in case of
detection of inactivity on the main channel.
2.14.2. Protocol
The RTU shall comply with IEC 870-5-104 IEC 870-5-101 DNP3.0 standard
protocol. The RTU shall support Secure Authentication according to IEC 62351-5.
2.14.3. Transmission
The communication system is based on optical fiber. The RMU-RTU power
supply shall be sized to supply the communication modem.
2.14.4. Transmitted data

The RMU-RTU shall transmit to the ADMS all the status and measurement. Each
data shall be individually configurable to be sent or not to the ADMS.
Section 16330
Page 27 of 35
The measurement shall be spontaneously sent to ADMS according to configuration
of:
- Threshold
- Dead band
2.14.5. Communication LAN for other devices

In order to ensure that future needs should be covered, the RMU-RTU shall be able
to provide additional communication ports:
- Ethernet port
- RS232/RS485 port
2.14.6. Power supply

 The RMU-RTU shall include a power supply which integrates a 12Vdc battery
charger
 The battery charger shall be compensated in temperature and protected against
deep discharge and overvoltage. A single 12Vdc battery is mandatory in order
to limit the maintenance constraints.
 In case of absence of the battery, the power supply shall be able to supply at
least the RMU-RTU.
 The power supply, from the battery voltage, provides the following :
 48Vdc± 10% for the motorisation (only applicable for RMU-Type-
B). This voltage shall be connected only in execute phase.
 12Vdc for the communicating devices.
 12Vdc for the RMU-RTU modules.
 Power supply input

 Input voltage: 230Vac ± 10%
 The power supply shall be insulated to 10kV and surge protected up
to 20kV, in compliance with IEC60255-5.
 Battery
 The battery capacity shall maintain a backup time of 2 hours for all
the voltage outputs and shall permit 10 Open/Close cycles of the
switchgear.
 The battery shall be able to withstand ambient temperature 50 C.
 The single 12Vdc battery shall be periodically checked, and a battery
fault shall be transmitted to the ADMS.
 The maximum battery charging time shall be 24hours.
Section 16330
Page 28 of 35
 Monitoring
 The power supply shall deliver the following statuses to the ADMS
 End of life detection
 Battery disconnected
 Absence of power input
 Voltage output faults
 Battery fault
 Any other data should be available through a serial link
communication.
2.14.7. Cyber Security
 In order to secure all controls and data acquisition, the RTU shall be designed
to be compliant with NERC and IEC62351 requirements. The RTU shall
support secure access based on RBAC, with the possibility to configure the
roles.
 Local and remote access connection shall be secured for maintenance (locally
and remotely) with HTTPS, SFTP, IPSEC and SSH protocols.
 Authentication shall be based on a Radius server.
Future proof design

Remote firmware update
- The RTU shall support remote firmware updates
Centralised RBAC management
- The RTU shall be evaluative in order to be compatible with a full centralised
RBAC management in compliance with IEC 62351-9
Hardening
Device hardening
- Disabled or unused functionality shall not compromise security.
- Unnecessary services and programs shall be removed. If removal is not
possible, the unnecessary services and programs shall be disabled.
Section 16330
Page 29 of 35
Interface minimization
- Each interface shall support only the data types and protocols needed to meet
the functional requirements.
- Unused interfaces and ports shall be removed. If removal is not possible, the
unused interfaces and ports shall be disabled.
- A complete list of supported data types and supported communication
protocols per interface shall be provided.
- All hardware interfaces that are used for programming or debugging shall be
completely removed after production.
Account hardening
- The RMU-RTU shall not contain active default, guest and anonymous
accounts.
- All remote access to root accounts on the RMU-RTU shall be disabled.
- All Vendor-owned accounts where feasible shall be removed.
- The list of all accounts on the RMU-RTU shall be provided.
Communication
Compliance to Security standards
The RTU shall follow the IEC 62351 standards and at least:
- IEC 62351-5 : 2013
- IEC 62351-8
Communication Security
The RTU shall support network and transport layer encryption using IPsec.
Configuration
- Access to the RMU-RTU by configuration tool shall be possible only through
secured connection: HTTPS for Webserver and SSH for console and
configuration tool.
Access control
RBAC
- The RTU shall support the implementation of Role-based Access Control in
compliance with IEC 62351-8.
- It must be possible to configure the privileges of individual roles. It must be
possible to carry out changes by configuration files through a secure way.
Section 16330
Page 30 of 35
- It must be possible to define more roles for future applications.
- It shall be possible to assign each role individual security credentials.
- It shall be possible to bind roles to individual user accounts on the RMU-RTU.
The minimum following function and data shall be controlled through RBAC:
- Configuration files
- Software update
- User management
- Executing program or shell command
- I/O on local maintenance access
A specific tool shall permit to configure the security policy, role and password.
Management of Security passwords
- The RMU-RTU service application shall support individual user passwords.
- Passwords shall be stored together with a salt using an allowed cryptographic
hash function.
- The RMU-RTU service application shall enforce a high complexity of
passwords.
- The RMU-RTU shall lock the access after several password error.
User Authentication
- The RMU-RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the WAN
interface using a challenge-response protocol based on message authentication
codes The RMU-RTU shall terminate the connection if the user authentication
fails.
- The RMU-RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the Local
Maintenance interface.
- It shall be possible to configure the RMU-RTU so that it blocks authentication
requests, either temporarily or permanently, from an account after a number of
failed login attempts. The number of failed login attempts and the time the
account is blocked shall be configurable.
Central management of user account
- The RMU-RTU should allow managing user authentication through a Radius
server.
Section 16330
Page 31 of 35
Security Log
- The RMU-RTU shall provide a local audit trail for all security events that
occur.
- Log files shall be produced in Syslog format.
- Security events shall be logged locally in a dedicated security log or/and on a
SYSLOG server.
Security testing
- The RMU-RTU shall comply with ACHILLE Level1.
2.15 TESTS
A. Supply test results to confirm that the switchgear and ring main units have been
tested to substantiate designs according to applicable Standards verifying not only
the performance of the switch but also the suitability of the enclosure venting,
rigidity and bus bracing. In addition, factory test each switch in accordance with
approved Standards.
B. All tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at works and at his expense and
under control and supervision of Egyptian Electricity Authority.
C. The contractor is responsible for testing all medium voltage switchgear and ring main
unites and all protection equipments...etc. as per EEA requirements on his expenses.
2.16 EQUIPMENT DATA
Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not be limited
to the following:
Construction and installation details for the main 24 kV switchgear equipment.

Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of cubicles.
Details of connection of high voltage cables to the cubicles.

Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and similar circuits.
The separate schematic diagrams shall include complete three line diagrams of all
instruments, switches, any other devices in the 24 kV switchgear Handling, installation
and assembly drawings.
Key interlocking scheme showing key numbers and operations performed.
Section 16330
Page 32 of 35
The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this section
shall include but not be limited to the following:
Complete technical data on the 24 kV switchgear other equipment including data on

operating characteristics, compliance with standards, dimensions and sights, detailed
description, operating mechanism etc.
Complete technical data on instruments protective and auxiliary relays, measuring

instruments including manufacturer's catalogues, operating characteristics, operating
curves, detailed description etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed. Notify Architect in

writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Routine work tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works in the presence
of the Owner's consultant.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgear as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,

requirements of applicable standards, NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies
with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgear with other work.
C. Mount the switchgear assembly on floor steel aligning channels elevated above
floor level by a concrete pad and as noted on the drawings. Provide shims to
achieve level installation.
D. Insure that switchgear are shipped in sections, which can be fitted through the
available structures.
E. Bond together the switchgear structure, sections and all terminating with a bare
copper earth cable and connect to the switchgear earth bus and to the earthing loop
as required.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
Section 16330
Page 33 of 35
equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not
indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques
specified in UL Standard 486A and B.
G. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
H. Provide 6.35mm minimum thick x 60cm wide insulation mat in front of ring main
units and rear of freestanding equipment.
I. Provide protective covering during construction for medium voltage switchgear.
J. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish for the switchgear.
K. Coordinate with and obtain approval of Utility Company for equipment

requirements including all metering prior to fabrication and installation.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been

energized, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When
possible, field-correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise remove and replace with new equipment and retest with no additional
cost to owner.
B. Prior to energization of switchgears and:
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth for one (1) minute. Minimum test voltage to be 2,500 volts D.C. with a
minimum resistance of 5,000 megohms.
2. Megger check phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulating resistance levels

of conductors.
3. Set all circuit breaker relays trip rating for maximum coordination with
upstream and downstream devices, including ground fault trips where supplied.
4. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize equipment and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements.
5. Open and close load break switching devices under load.
Section 16330
Page 34 of 35
3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in

procedures for starting up, testing and operating H.V. switchgear and auxiliary
equipment. Furnish three operator's manual providing installation and operating
instructions for the medium voltage switchgear.
Section 16330
Page 35 of 35
SECTION 16430
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES

MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this Section.
C. Wires and cables section 16120.
D. Distribution transformer section 16270.
E. Primary Medium Voltage Switchgears And Ring Main Units section 16330.
F. Instruments and metering section 16290.
G. Air circuit breakers section 16490.
H. Moulded case circuit breakers section 16492.
I. Testing and commissioning section 16950
J. Specification Section 15241: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and
related contract drawings, apply to this section of the work.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make all switchgears ready for operation in accordance with drawings and
specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgears of the types, and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC – 61439-1&2
and IEC – 60947&IEC-61643 Standards pertaining to switchgear.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Low Voltage Switchgear Assemblies

Main Distribution Board
Section 16430
Page 1 of 13
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for switchgears, including size, enclosures, and
electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
C. Relay and C.B Coordination study:
Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.

The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on log-log papers manually or by software
program showing that the choice of the C.B. and relay settings are correct and selectivity
coordinated.
D. If selectivity coordination study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to change or
add any number of breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully achieved
with no extra cost to the employer.
E. Short circuit and Voltage Drop Calculation
Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculations based on the
actual impedance values of the electrical components such as utility short circuit level at the
medium voltage 22KV (shall not be less than 750MVA), transformer, bus bars and cables ... etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All main distribution boards shall be type-tested.
B. The switchgears shall be 660 V class 3PH, 50HZ completely wired and type tested at the factory,
ready for installation on the site. Sectionalizing shall be accomplished and bracing provided for
access of the equipment into the building.
C. Switchgears shall be designed and manufactured to comply with IEC -61439, VDE 660 Part 500,
UTE 63 - 410.
D. The Electrical installation has been designed to give load balance across the phases as far as
possible but it is the contractor's responsibility to maintain or improve the balance when making
connections to bars etc.
When the final commissioning is to be completed, the contractor shall allow in his tender for
checking loads and altering connections in order to achieve as even a balance over the phases as
possible.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. The switchgears shall be of the totally enclosed, front and rear. accessible, indoor type, of size,
rating and form 2b arrangement as indicated on the Drawings. The complete assembly shall be
floor mounted, free standing, with matching cases, to form a continuous integral structure.

Section 16430
Page 2 of 13
B. Switchgears shall consist of the required number of compartmented formed and welded sheet
enclosures required to mount circuit- breakers and other specified equipment or as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Switchgears shall be completely enclosed with hinged front covers and removable steel plates of
not less than 2 mm gauge on sides, top and rear.
D. All fastenings between structural members shall be bolted, not welded, to provide flexibility
during installation.
E. The arrangement shall permit the busbars and/or cables to enter from the top or bottom of the
enclosures as shown on the Drawings and connect at their respective terminals without
interference.
F. A modular arrangement shall be used to permit interchanging differently sized device cover
plates without additional drilling of structure.
G. Structures and busses shall be arranged to permit future sections to be added. A suitable cover
plate shall be provided for temporary protection.
H. Switchgears shall be dust, vermin and rodent proof IP42 according to IEC-60529.
All compartments shall be suitably ventilated where required.
I. Switchgears shall be form 2-2b.
J. The switchgear busses shall be braced for a short-circuit duty as indicated on the drawings.
K. All bolted and plug-in connections shall be Electro-silver plated to a minimum thickness of
0.0125 mm.
L. Suitable arrangement and equipment shall be provided for extracting and unloading the
circuit-breakers from their cells.
M. A special trolley shall be supplied together with the switchgear for removal or installation of the
air-circuit breakers from their compartment for maintenance or repair.
N. An earth bus extending the entire length of the assembly shall be provided. The bus shall be sized
in accordance with the Regulations.
O. The switchgear shall be sanded and rust inhibited after fabrication, Electro - static painted on
both inside and outside surfaces colour shall be Grey.
P. The Switchgear shall be provided with inlet air filtration.
Q. The Switchgear shall be provided with Ethernet switch with suitable no. of data ports to collect
the data from the circuit breakers, smart digital power meters and transfer it to local BMS &
RMU-RTU (a specified in section 16330).

Section 16430
Page 3 of 13
2.3 BUS BARS
A. All copper bus bars, switching devices and connections shall be of sufficient sizes and silver
plated at contact to limit the temperature rise to 25 C over an average ambient temperature of 45
C outside the enclosure.
B. The bus bars rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.
All bus bars and connections shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance purposes.
C. Bus bars are to be of high conductivity copper and rigidly supported to withstand the mechanical
stress of a rated short- time withstand current of 80KA (rms) for 1 sec. in accordance with IEC
recommendation No. 439-1
D. Main bus shall be of continuous construction. Main bus joints and all top connections shall be
silver plated and tightly bolted to insure maximum conductivity.
E. Bus bars shall be clearly marked with their respective phase colors and shall be furnished for
future extensions.
F. Clearance to earth and to other live metal are to be in accordance with the standards.
G. The main set of bus bars shall be housed in segregated chamber at the top. Bus bar top covers
shall be capable of supporting a man weight without deflection.
H. Incoming and outgoing supplies to switchgears shall be either busways or cables as indicated on
drawings.
I. A full length ground copper bus shall be provided. The ground bus shall be bounded to the metal
enclosure of each compartment and to metering and relaying. Lugs shall be provided one at each
end of the ground bus and one in each cubicle for the user's copper ground cables.
J. The cross sectional area of neutral bus bars shall not be less than that of the associated phase bars.
K. Access to bus bars and bus bar connections shall be possible only after the removal of covers
secured by bolts or studs. Such covers shall be identified externally by engraved laminated labels
bearing the inscription "BUSBARS DANGER 380 VOLTS" in 30mm high black lettering on a
yellow background.
L. Connections from main and dropper busbars to the supply side of functional units shall be by
means of dedicated conductors. Conductors installed on a loop in principle shall not be
acceptable.
M. All neutral supply/load connections shall be made via the enclosure containing the associated
functional unit. Common neutral terminals shall not be acceptable.
N. Where specified in the schedules, or shown on the drawings, switched neutrals shall be provided.
Otherwise bolted neutrals shall be provided. The bolted section shall be mounted in the
compartment containing the associated functional unit or as a separate functional unit and be safe
and easy to access.
O. No diversity shall be used in busbar dropper sizing.

Section 16430
Page 4 of 13
P. All the bus bars shall be made from rectangular high grade electrolytic copper with purity of at
least 99.9%.
Q. The cross section area of the earth bus bars shall be at least 50% of that of the phase’s bus – bars.
R. All the bus bars shall be insulated with heat shrinkable colored in red, yellow, blue and black for
the 3-phases and natural bus bars, respectively.
S. The bus bars shall be mounted on insulators made from porcelain or cast resin according to the
IEC standard.
2.4 MAIN CIRCUITS
A. Main circuit wiring shall be LSF insulated to IEC, DIN/VDE standards and, where appropriate,
sized for Type 2 protection coordination to IEC 947, but with a minimum size of 2.5mm2.
Connections to and from functional units shall be segregated from control and adequately
supported to withstand the forces due to short-circuit faults. The sizes of wires shall be calculated
in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B. All cable connections shall be made at fixed terminals with no intermediate joints.
C. Insulated conductors shall not rest against bare live parts or exposed sharp edges.
2.5 AUXILIARY WIRING
A. All non-screened auxiliary wiring, except that which is required to be screened, shall be carried
out on 600/1000V grade insulated, multi-stranded flexible conductors complying with IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
B. The minimum conductor size shall be 1.5mm².
C. All auxiliary wiring shall be identified at both ends with numbered and resistor color coded
ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the control schematic wiring diagram.
D. All auxiliary wiring shall be contained within cabling trunking and totally segregated from power
wiring as far as practicable. Wiring of circuits at different voltage categories, e.g. L.V. and ELV,
shall be segregated. Joints will not be permitted on wiring between devices.
E. Cable trunking shall be of the ventilated type with clip-on covers and purpose made junctions and
accessories. Cables shall not occupy more than 25% of the trunking cross-sectional area.
F. Wiring not contained within trunking shall be strapped in looms with removable straps and held
in place by suitable cleats. Looms shall not exceed more than 25 wires. Self-adhesive straps shall
not be acceptable.
G. All wiring connections from trunking and looms to devices shall be run in straight lines,
horizontally and vertically, and be neatly dressed.
H. Wiring to door mounted devices shall be flexible and provided with a large enough loop to clear
the edge of the opening. Protection against abrasion shall be provided by means of flexible
conduit or spiral wrapping securely fixed at each end.
Section 16430
Page 5 of 13
I. Where wiring passes through partitions it shall be protected against abrasion by thermoplastic
grommets and spiral wrapping.
J. Interconnections between functional units shall be contained within a separate cabling chamber
or trunking. All cables shall terminate on the functional unit terminals within the cubicle.
2.6 LABELS
A. All enclosures containing functional units shall be clearly labeled with a circuit, unit reference
and current rating.
B. All labels shall be of the engraved type made from suitable multi-layer laminate and shall be
fixed with zinc plated cheese head instrument screws. No other type of label will be acceptable.
C. Every functional unit shall be labeled separately from all others. External labels shall have letters
not less than 5mm in height and internal labels not less than 3mm. The letters shall be black in
color on a white background.
D. All covers/doors not fitted with interlocked switched disconnectors enclosing unshrouded live
equipment shall be fitted with warning labels inscribed "DANGER 400V ISOLATE BEFORE
OPENING".
E. Warning labels shall have black letters on a bright yellow background. Wherever possible, letters
shall be not less than 30mm in height. On small covers and doors letters of 20mm or 10mm in
height shall be used.
F. Cable boxed shall be clearly labeled both externally and internally with the circuit and functional
device number.
G. All terminal blocks shall be labeled relative to the respective functional unit.
H. Every control and metering device, selector switch, pushbutton and indicator light shall be clearly
labeled to indicate its purpose.
I. Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together with a rating plate.
J. Fixed and with drawable portions of equipment including fixed and plug-in devices shall be
labeled with drawable portions cross-referenced to their fixed part.
K. Proposed engraving details shall be submitted for comment prior to engraving.
2.7 EARTHING
A. Each assembly shall be provided with a continuous copper earth bar running the whole length
sized in accordance with IEC 60865 standards for the prospective short-circuit current.
B. Discrete terminals shall be provided for connection to all the protective conductors. Each
individual section of the assembly shall be separately bonded to the main earth bar.

Section 16430
Page 6 of 13
2.8 COMPONENTS
A. All components shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of their manufacturers. This
requirement does not negate the requirement for type and routine testing as specified elsewhere in
this Specification.
B. Adjusting and resetting devices shall be easily accessible.
C. All actuators for emergency switching devices shall be mounted between 0.8m and 1.6m above
the base of the assembly.
D. All components shall be installed and wired such that their function is not impaired by interaction
such as heat, arcs, vibration, and fields of energy present in normal operation.
E. Barriers for manual switching devices shall be designed such that arcs caused by switching under
normal operation or the interruption or making of a fault current shall not present a danger to the
operator.
F. All removable and with drawable components shall be installed and designed such that they can
be safely disconnected or connected to supply circuits while the associated conductors are live.
G. All spare contacts on relays, contactors, and the like shall be wired to easily accessible terminal
blocks, suitably positioned for future external wiring.
H. Assemblies shall be provided with a spare set of fuses mounted on polyethylene coated spring
clips adjacent to the fuse chart on the doors of a separate cubicle. A total of 20% of each size of
fuse shall be provided with a minimum 4 number of each size.
When commissioning is complete the panel shall be handed over with this complete set of spare
fused. A fully detailed fuse chart shall be provided in the same cubicle as the fuses.
I. Where moulded case circuit-breakers are installed they shall be fitted with rotary action handles.
The handles shall be lockable in the "OFF" position.
2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES/PUSH-BUTTONS/INDICATOR LAMPS
A. The manufacturer's range shall include fully interchangeable contact blocks and lamp holder
blocks which can be fitted to all actuators including switches and push-buttons.
B. Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, with lever or key operated actuators as specified in
the schedules or shown on the drawings.
C. Pushbuttons shall be of the flush type. Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and to IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
D. Pushbuttons used for emergency stop purposes shall be of the mushroom head type, with a twist
to release action or key reset as specified in the schedule.
E. Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts, in 'NO' or "NC' configuration rated
at not less than 5A resistive at 220V 50HZ.

Section 16430
Page 7 of 13
F. Indicating lamps shall be of the flush type 22mm diameter with removable colored lenses,
allowing lamps to be changed from the front and shall be provided with a push to test facility.
Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
G. Indicating lamps on control circuits shall be equipped with completely sealed dual wound safety
isolating transformers and in-built test relay.
H. Fuse failure lamps shall be of the neon type with current limiting device
2.10 WIRING TERMINALS
A. Cable terminations and space for terminations shall be suitable for the sizes of cable called for in
the design, refer to Cable Schedules.
B. Terminal blocks shall be made of thermosetting melamine or polyamide material with a low
tracking index and good flame resistance, tested to withstand a temperature rise of 90 C above
ambient temperature.
Provision shall be made for permanent labels to be applied to each terminal for identification
purposes.
C. All terminals shall be marked in accordance with DIN/VDE standards.
D. All terminals for control wiring shall have provision for plug-in test spills and in addition be
fitted with isolating links. Current carrying parts shall be made of tinned brass or copper.
E. Completely shrouded terminals of the tunnel type shall be used for cup to 10mm². The screw
clamp connection shall be vibration proof, self-locking and suitable for clamping two condo.
F. Stranded cables up to 10mm² shall be terminated in copper or copper alloy ferrule shall retain all
strands of the cable.
G. Terminals for cables in excess of 10mm² shall be of the double connection type with bolted studs
for the connection of cable lugs. The terminal and stud size shall be adequate for the current
carried and the size of cable. Suitable insulating partitions and protective covers shall be
provided.
H. All auxiliary wiring except screened cables shall be connected to incoming/outgoing cables Via
insulated terminal blocks, screw/screw type, clipped onto DIN rails. There shall be sufficient
space on the DIN rail for future terminal blocks of not less than 10% or 5 No. whichever is the
greater.
I. Wires shall enter terminals singly.
J. Plugs and fixed sockets for the application shall be provided for the termination of screened
cables.
K. All terminations shall be mounted at least 0.2m above the base of floor mounted assemblies.
K. All load terminals shall be suitable for the types and sizes of cables as specified in the schedules
and drawings.

Section 16430
Page 8 of 13
2.11 WORKS TESTS
A. All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of IEC 61439..
B. TYPE TESTED ASSEMBLIES
Where TTAs are specified, certification shall be provided for all type and routine tests to
DIN/VDE standards.
C. PARTIALLY TYPE TESTED ASSEMBLIES
Where PTTAs are specified, compliance with the test requirements of BS 5486, shall be either by
type testing or by extrapolation from type tested assemblies or individual parts of similar,
representative construction. Verification of the Type Testing Certification or the appropriate
extrapolation calculations shall be provided. Certificates shall also be provided for routine tests in
compliance with DIN/VDE standards.
D. Calculation from first principles for temperature rise and short-circuit strength will not be
acceptable.
E. Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for assemblies having a rated
PSSC not exceeding 10KA or those protected by current limiting devices with a cut-off current
not exceeding 15KA.
F. Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for auxiliary circuits connected
to transformers whose:
(i) Rated power dose not exceed 10KVA for a rated secondary voltage of not less than
110V.
or
(ii) Rated power does not exceed 1.6KVA with a rated secondary voltage of less than 110V,
and whose relative short-circuit voltage is not less than 4%.
G. Works tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning test.
H. Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to overload,
short-circuit and earth fault conditions.
I. Works tests shall be done in the presence of Employer consultant.
1. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition including evidence of moisture or

corona.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances.

Section 16430
Page 9 of 13
4. Clean the unit.
5. Verify that fuse and/or circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to drawings and
coordination study as well as to the circuit breaker's address for microprocessor-
communication packages.
6. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to

drawings.
7. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-

wrench method
8. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.
1. Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
2. Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal

positions.
11. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
12. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
13. Exercise all active components.
14. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
15. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
16. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers.
17. Inspect control power transformers.
1. Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of

connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
Section 16430
Page 10 of 13
2. Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings or circuit breakers match
drawings.
3. Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and

interlocks.
2. Electrical Tests
1. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers
2. Perform ground-resistance tests
3. Perform resistance measurements through bolted electrical connections with a low-

resistance ohmmeter
4. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground, for one minute .
5. Perform an overpotential test on each bus section, each phase to ground with phases not
under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer
has no recommendation for this test. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute.
6. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied

potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt
rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or
control devices that can not tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturer’s
recommendation.
7. Perform system function tests in accordance with Section 8.
8. Control Power Transformers
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from

winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
2. Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in switchgear with

multiple power sources.
9. Voltage Transformers
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from

winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground.
2. Verify secondary voltages.
10. Verify operation of switchgear/switchboard heaters.
3. Test Values
1. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.

Section 16430
Page 11 of 13
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with Table 10.12 unless otherwise specified
by manufacturer.
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as
indicated in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available,
investigate any values which deviate from similar bus by more than 50 percent of the
lowest value.
4. Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers shall be in

accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's
published data. Values of insulation resistance less than this table or manufacturer's
minimum should be investigated. Overpotential tests should not proceed until
insulation-resistance levels are raised above minimum values.
5. Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
6. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed, and notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
B. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IEE 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all L.V panels should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgears as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgears with other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment grounding
connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
equipment connectors.
D. Provide properly wired electrical connections for switchgears within enclosures.

Section 16430
Page 12 of 13
E. Double lugging is not permitted.
F. Fill out switchgears circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
G. Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective
ground for switchgears.
A. Upon completion of installation of switchgear and after circuiting has been energized,
demonstrate capability and compliance of switchgear with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units and retest.
B. Prior to energization of switchgears circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's
tightening torque specifications.
C. Prior to energization of switchgears, check with earthing resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
D. Prior to energization, check switchgears for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short circuits.
E. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F. After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
3.4 INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring,
terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the central control system
and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 220 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add interposing
relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier (either 4-
20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).

Section 16430
Page 13 of 13
SECTION 16440
DISTRIBUTION BOXES AND LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR AND OUTDOOR

TYPE)
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions, apply to work of this section.
section.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all distribution Boxes in
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of distribution

Boxes of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, UL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to distribution
Boxes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for distribution Boxes including size,
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background

drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Rev.01 August, 2018 Distribution Boxes And Lighting

Panels (Indoor And Outdoor Type)
Section 16440
Page 1 of 7
2.1.1 Distribution Boxes
A. Distribution Boxes shall be provided with number of fuses rated as shown on the
drawings and to be as specified by EEA.
Distribution Boxes shall be designed for three different sizes as follows:
 200 KVA rating, with copper bus of size 10x50mm

 100 KVA rating, with copper bus of size 10x50mm
B. Distribution Boxes shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
C. All interior components shall be mounted on a rigid fabricated chassis capable of

being removed and/or reversed for ease of wiring.
D. Distribution Boxes shall be provided with a suitable earth bar and neutral bar,
with adequate provision for the connection of a circuit protective conductor for
each outgoing feeder.
E. Terminals for the neutral conductor shall allow the individual connection of
conductors having a current carrying capacity equal to the full current carrying
capacity of the phase conductor.
F. Unless otherwise specified on the schedules or drawings, distribution Box cases

shall be fabricated from zinc-coated or heavily rust-proofed heavy gauge sheet
steel and be of all-welded construction. They shall be adequately braced or
stiffened, by folding or otherwise, to form a completely rigid enclosure. Exterior
corners and edges shall be rounded so as to give a smooth overall appearance.
The sheet steel shall be not less than 2 mm thickness.
G. Distribution Boxes shall have a side-hung hinged front cover, attached by means
of lift-off hinges, and fitted with cylinder type locking handles and provided with
lock and key or other approved means. Covers shall be braced or folded in such
a manner as to prevent distortion or whip, and shall be fitted with dust-proofing
gaskets or edge seals.
H. Distribution Box cases shall provide a degree of protection IP54.
I. Distribution Box cases shall be of such dimensions that adequate space is

available for manoeuvering and connecting the incoming and outgoing cables.
J. Distribution Boxes shall be arranged for bottom entry according to the

requirements specified on the drawings or in the schedules.

Section 16440
Page 2 of 7
K. Distribution Boxes shall be provided with detachable end plates as specified in
the schedules or drawings.
L. Each distribution Box shall be provided with an engraved plastic label on the
outside of the front cover, bearing the designation of the Box and its reference
number, if any, as given on the drawings or in the schedules. The label shall be
fixed in position by chromium-plated set screws. Each such label shall be not
less in size than 100 mm x 30 mm, and shall bear the required inscription in
white on a black background, using letters and/or digits not less than 5 mm high.
M. Distribution Box covers shall incorporate locking facilities as specified by EEA.
2.1.2 LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR TYPE)
A. Lighting panels shall be miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) or Moulded case

circuit breaker boards as specified in the schedules or drawings.
B. Lighting panels shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
C. All interior components shall be mounted on a rigid fabricated chassis capable of

being removed and/or reversed for ease of wiring.
D. Lighting panels shall be provided with a suitable earth bar and neutral bar, with
adequate provision for the connection of a circuit protective conductor for each
outgoing way.
E. Terminals for the neutral conductor shall allow the individual connection of
conductors having a current carrying capacity equal to the full current carrying
capacity of the phase conductor.
F. When the means of isolating the lighting panels from the incoming supply is not
to be mounted immediately adjacent to the board, means shall be provided in the
lighting panels to indicate whether or not the supply is "ON".
G. Unless otherwise specified on the schedules or drawings, lighting panels cases

shall be fabricated from zinc-coated or heavily rust-proofed heavy gauge sheet
steel and be of all-welded construction. They shall be adequately braced or
stiffened, by folding or otherwise, to form a completely rigid enclosure. Exterior
corners and edges shall be rounded so as to give a smooth overall appearance.
H. Lighting panels shall have a side-hung hinged front cover, attached by means of
lift-off hinges, and fitted with cylinder type locking handles. Covers shall be
braced or folded in such a manner as to prevent distortion or whip, and shall be
fitted with dust-proofing gaskets or edge seals.

Section 16440
Page 3 of 7
I. Lighting panels cases shall provide a degree of protection IP31.
J. Lighting panels cases shall be of such dimensions that adequate space is

available for manoeuvering and connecting the incoming and outgoing cables.
K. Lighting panels shall be arranged for top or bottom or top and bottom entry
according to the requirements specified on the drawings or in the schedules.
L. Lighting panels shall be provided with detachable end plates as specified in the
schedules or drawings.
M. Each lighting panels shall be provided with a durable circuit chart fixed to the
inside of the cover or immediately adjacent and bearing typewritten details, in
plain language, of the circuits supplied by each of the ways. The chart shall be
on heavy weight paper or thin card, and shall be protected by means of a rigid
transparent plastic cover, it shall be mounted in such a way that it can easily be
removed for correction or alteration, then replaced. The size of the chart shall be
such that there is adequate space of recording all of the required information and,
in any case, shall not be less than A5 (210 mm x 148 mm).
N. Each way in the lighting panels shall be clearly numbered to correspond with the
numbering on the circuit chart.
O. Each lighting panels shall be provided with an engraved plastic label on the
outside of the front cover, bearing the designation of the board and its reference
number, if any, as given on the drawings or in the schedules. The label shall be
fixed in position by chromium-plated set screws. Each such label shall be not
less in size than 100 mm x 30 mm, and shall bear the required inscription in
white on a black background, using letters and/or digits not less than 5 mm high.
P. Lighting panels covers shall incorporate locking facilities as specified in the

schedules.
2.1.3 LIGHTING PANELS (OUDOOR TYPE)
A. Same specification as 2.1.2 except a degree of protection shall be 1P54, self

supported on concrete foundation for street lighting control.
B. The lighting panels shall be provided to control the street lighting circuits by
photocell element, timer and selector switch automatic-off-manual through
lighting contractor as shown on the drawings.
2.2 WORKS TESTS
A. All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of DIN/VDE

standards Part 1, plus requirements of associated standards.
Section 16440
Page 4 of 7
B. Works tests shall include inspection of all and a complete electrical functioning
test.
C. Works tests shall be done in the presence of Owner consultant.
2.3 FIELD TESTING
A. ASSEMBLES
All assemblies shall be subjected to the routine tests as defined in IEC,

DIN/VDE standards. after installation on site. Test Certificates shall be provided.
B. FUNCTIONAL UNITS
All functional units shall be checked for correct mechanical operation.
2.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on completed

sections of the Works, each switchgear assembly shall be duly commissioned
and left in full working order. The term "Commissioning" shall be deemed to
include:
(i) The energizing of functional device circuits and equipment which have
previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of
being energized with complete safety.
(ii) The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including
that supplied and installed under other contracts, and as specified in the
schedules.
(iii) The verification of the performance of each distribution Box relative to

all such plant and equipment by the carrying out, where required, of
further tests and the making of all necessary adjustments so as to obtain
optimum performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which distribution Boxes and enclosures are to be

installed, and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
Section 16440
Page 5 of 7
completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install distribution Boxes as indicated, in accordance manufactur's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of distribution Boxes with

other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment
earthing connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published
torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
D. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically anchored. Provide all angle units and
accessories for proper mounting.
E. Provide properly wired electrical connections for distribution Boxes within

enclosures.
F. Double lugging is not permitted.
G. Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a

permanent and effective ground for distribution Boxes.
A. Upon completion of installation of distribution Boxes and after circuiting has

been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of distribution box
with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new
units and retest.
B. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to

manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.
C. Prior to energization of distribution Boxes, check with ground resistance tester

phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure
requirements are fulfilled.
D. Prior to energization, check distribution Boxes for electrical continuity of

circuits.
Section 16440
Page 6 of 7
E. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F. After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.

Section 16440
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 16490
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to air circuit breakers with solid state trip units specified
D. Low voltage switchgear assemblies main distribution board, Section 16430.
E. Testing and commissioning, section 16950
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation, air circuit breakers with solid state trip units as shown in
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air circuit breaker of the types and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years. Provide air circuit breakers produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable
Manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 947, EN 60947
and Standards pertaining to air circuit breakers which have been UL listed and labeled.
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for air circuit breakers with solid state trip units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Air circuit-breakers shall be provided with solid state trip units fixed type as indicated on the
drawings, shall be in accordance with NEMA or IEC standards requirements.
B. All circuit breakers connected in one electrical circuit should be fully selective & coordinated, if
selectivity coordination study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to add or change
Rev.01 August, 2018 Air Circuit Breakers
Section 16490
Page 1 of 8
any number of breakers, relays,… such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully achieved
with no extra cost to the employer.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
ACBs shall be metal-clad, horizontal cassette type with positively driven "ON/OFF" indication.
B. INTERCHANGE
Means shall be incorporated to prevent the wrong circuit-breaker being racked in at fixed
position.
C. SECURITY
Means shall be provided to padlock the breaker in the service, isolated and test positions; and to
close and independently padlock the shutters as specified in the schedules. It shall not be possible
to withdraw or rack-in shall be prevented.
Robust padlocks or cylinder locks shall be provided to lock each circuit-breaker in one or other
position during on-site testing and commissioning. This shall include locking the shutters closed
when a circuit-breaker is racked out. Two sets of keys shall be provided for each padlock,
together with a key cabinet and key schedule.
D. ACBs shall be fitted with the protection devices solid state type, instruments indicators and
auxiliary control functions as specified in the schedules/drawings.
E. OPERATING MECHANISMS
ACBs shall be of the three-pole type as specified in the schedules/drawings.
Where specified, operating mechanisms shall be the trip-free type and shall have a latching
current equal to the short-circuit prospective value. Alternatively, the ACB shall be fitted with an
instantaneous digital trip or making current release which operates when the ACB is closed onto
a short-circuit. Anti-pumping devices shall be fitted to all operating mechanisms.
The specific method of closing shall be as specified in the schedules or drawings, as one of the
following:
(i) Type MSO: Manual, spring operated closing arrangement with a handle for charging and
releasing the spring in one stroke.
(ii) TYPE MSM or MSE: Manual, spring operated arrangement where the spring is charged
to a latched position pending mechanical/electrical initiation of closure. The spring
system shall incorporate the facility of charging for a second closure when the breaker is
closed.
(iii) TYPE MWS: motor wound charged spring as types MSM or MSE. Motor wiring and
control circuitry shall be internal.
(iv) TYPE SOC : solenoid operated from d.c. when available or rectified a.c.

Section 16490
Page 2 of 8
Where ACBs with a spring stored energy closing mechanism are used in an arrangement
involving interlocking with other ACBs, the manual discharge of the spring closing
mechanism shall be disabled by the interlocking system.
Facilities shall be provided to remove or blank off the integral mechanical "CLOSE" pushbutton
where it could be used to override protection devices, lockout relays or remote operating signals.
Mechanisms which store energy shall be fitted with stored energy status indicators.
F. OPERATING FACILITIES
The ACB shall have facilities for isolation, withdrawal and test position operations with the ACB
isolated. Carriage position switches shall be provided for connection into appropriate control
circuits to permit electrical interlocks to be defeated when the ACB is in the isolated and (where
applicable) test positions as specified in the schedules.
Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earthing facilities shall be provided, to earth the
circuit and busbars in the service, test and isolated positions.
G. OPERATION CLEARANCE
Circuit-breakers shall be installed with full clearances for arc-chute vents and adequate side
clearances for unimpeded operation and maintenance.
2.3 RATING
The service performance characteristics shall be as specified in the schedules and drawings.
Ratings specified are the required on-site ratings. Written confirmation shall be provided to
confirm that specified ratings will be obtainable under the conditions in which each circuit-
breaker operates. Operating conditions shall include due allowance for ambient temperature,
enclosure, physical situation, position and attitude of the ACB and the proximity of other devices
on full load.
B. LABELLING
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker on
which the service performance characteristics shall be displayed.
2.4 PROTECTION AND TRIPPING
A. RELAYS
Protective relay requirements shall be selected so as to ensure full discrimination between system
levels by the tenderer. Protective relays shall be of the solid state type with adjustable for long
time, short time and instantaneous protection features, in addition to ground fault proection for all
breakers of 1000 AMP. and above. Relays shall comply with IEC, NEC,NEMA, DIN/VDE
standards.
All relays shall be provided with test facilities for use in commissioning and testing from the
front of the switchgear.

Section 16490
Page 3 of 8
Relays shall be of the integral or external type.
B. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of ACB at time of tender. The
details shall include manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing over current and
short-circuit discrimination and, additionally a full set of overlay transparency discrimination
curves to enable discrimination settings to be checked.
All over current and short-circuit protective devices (relays as item "A" above) shall have
separately adjustable time and current settings. Adjustments and settings shall be possible from
the front of the ACB. The setting adjustment devices shall be behind a lockable cover plate, or
similarly protected against unauthorized access.
Energy for protective devices shall be obtained from integral current transformers. Separate
current transformers shall be of the accuracy class specified in the schedules and comply with
IEC, DIN/VDE NEMA standards, and of suitable ratio and rating for the operating conditions. If
the circuit-breaker is de-rated because of high temperature then the current transformers shall be
replaced with ones suitable for the higher operating temperatures. Protection current transformers
shall not be de-rated.
Under voltage, trip and closing coils which shall incorporate adjustable time delay shall
incorporates adjustable time delay shall be wired out to secondary isolating contacts in the same
position on each breaker to ensure interchangeability of ACBs with the same service performance
characteristics.
C. STATUS INDICATION AND REMOTE CONTROL
ACB’s trip units shall be equipped with the Breaker Communications Status Module to perform
the following functions:
 ON/OFF indication.
 Trip indication.
All signals to be transferred to RMU-RTU (as specified in section 16330).
D. COMMISSION LABEL
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker, on
which the final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be displayed.
2.5 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A. ACB auxiliary circuits shall be arranged to provide a wiping action on contacts during
withdrawal and re-instatement of the ACB, to and from its isolated position
B. On completion of the switchgear installation, each ACB shall be provided with auxiliary contacts
available for future use for both the ACB contact operation and the isolation operation as
specified in the schedules/drawings. Wiring to the switching contacts shall be ferruled and
brought to a terminal block.
C. All auxiliary contacts shall be mounted in accessible positions and away from possible electrical
and mechanical danger.
Section 16490
Page 4 of 8
2.6 SHUTTERS
A. Where ACBs are isolated, safety shutters shall automatically cover exposed conductors.
B. The shutters shall be able to be padlocked in the closed position, but shall be capable of being
fixed open where tests require conductor contact.
C. Shutter shall operate automatically by the movement of the circuit-breaker, preferably without
using springs.
D. Shutters shall be painted to IEC, DIN/VDE standards:
Shutters Color Ref. Lettering Additional

(White) Requirements
Incoming "Signal IEC, DIN/ "DANGER _____
Circuit Red" VDE LIVE
Shutters CABLES"
Busbar "Signal IEC, DIN/ "BUSBARS _____
Circuit Red" VDE
Shutters
Bus- "Signal IEC, DIN/ "BUSBARS With white arrows to
Section Red" VDE (on each) indicate the section of
Shutters switchgear with which the
shuttered contacts are
associated
Circuit IEC, DIN/ _____ _____
Shutters "Lemon" VDE
2.7 FINISHES
A. Special treatments and finishes such as tropicalisation, anticorrosion finish and cold-climate
treatment shall be applied where specified or where conditions make such treatment necessary.
2.8 TOOLS
A. Loose equipment shall include test leads and a lifting and transporting device plus any other tools
or equipment needed for routine maintenance.
THE TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT SHALL INCLUDE BUT NOT NECSSARILY BE LIMITED TO :-
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.

Section 16490
Page 5 of 8
3. Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the breaker.
5. Clean the unit.
6. Inspect arc chutes.
7. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition, wear, and alignment.
8. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to satisfactory operation
of the breaker are correct.
9. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and its operating
mechanism in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
10. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench

method.
11. Verify cell fit and element alignment.
12. Verify racking mechanism operation.
15. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings, if applicable.
2. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter, if

applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the
circuit breaker closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance
with manufacturer’s published data.
3. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
4. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential
shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test
duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer’s
recommendation.

Section 16490
Page 6 of 8
5. Make adjustments to the trip settings in accordance with the coordination study.
6. Determine minimum pickup current by primary current injection.
7. Determine long-time delay by primary current injection.
8. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
9. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection.
10. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection.
11. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
12. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground-fault or undervoltage trip devices, to insure
operation of shunt trip devices. Check the operation of electrically-operated breakers in their
cubicles.
13. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils.
14. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone
interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, antipump function, trip unit battery
condition, and reset all trip logs and indicators.
15. Verify operation of charging mechanism.
3. Test Values
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated
in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values
which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Circuit breaker insulation resistance.
5. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously obtained

results but not less than two megohms.
6. Trip characteristics of breakers should fall within manufacturer's published time-current tolerance
bands.
7. Minimum pickup voltage on shunt trip and close coils should be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data.

Section 16490
Page 7 of 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine conditions under which air circuit breakers are to be installed and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all Air circuit breakers should be subjected to testing as performed in the
factory to ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized
(SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air circuit breakers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of air circuit breakers.
C. Provide carriage for with drawable circuit breaker.
A. Prior to energization of air circuit breakers, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short
circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new unites and then demonstrate compliance with
requirements.

Section 16490
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 16491
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
C. Distribution boards section 16740.
D. The requirements of this section apply to miniature circuit breakers specified

necessary to complete and make miniature circuit breakers ready for operation in
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of miniature circuit

breakers of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide miniature circuit
breakers produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to miniature circuit breakers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for miniature circuit breakers.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Miniature Circuit Breakers

Section 16491
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB's) complying with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards shall

be acceptable, however, all MCB's shall comply with the same standard and be
from the same manufacturer's range. MCB's shall be rated for uninterrupted duty at
220/380V.
B. MCBs shall have Type Tested. Manufacturer's tripping characteristics shall be

provided for each type of MCB specified.
C. Service and ultimate short-circuit capacities shall be as specified in the switchboard

details.
D. All MCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance level for incoming and
outgoing for each panel .
E. The joule integral (I² t) energy withstand let-through shall be specified for each
MCB.
F. In multi-pole MCBs, including four-pole, all poles shall open, close and trip
simultaneously.
2.2 MECHANISMS
A. Mechanisms shall be quick-make, quick-break, over-center type which are trip-free.

The contact position shall be positively indicated by coloured bands and/or lettering
to show whether the contacts are open or closed.
2.3 SECURITY
A. MCBs shall be proved with effective means of locking in the "OFF" position.
2.4 CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
A. MCB current ratings and instantaneous tripping characteristics shall be as specified

in the Cable and Distribution Board Schedules
B. The manufacturer's standard range shall include all MCB ratings, characteristics
and auxiliaries specified in the schedule.

Section 16491
Page 2 of 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which miniature circuit breakers are to be installed and
notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install miniature circuit breakers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements
and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of miniature circuit breakers.
A. Prior to energization of miniature circuit breakers, test for continuity of circuitry

and for short circuits. Replace malfunctioning breakers with new breakers, and then
demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Section 16491
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 16492
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1
(General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to moulded case circuit breakers solid state type specified
D. Low voltage switchgear assemblies main distribution boards. Section 16430.
E. Distribution boards section 16440.
F. Testing and commissioning section 16950.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete
and make moulded case circuit breakers ready for operation in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of moulded case circuit breakers solid state
type whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. produced
by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-4,
IEC 60947-4-1 and Standards pertaining to moulded case circuit breakers solid state type (adjustable for
long time , short time and instantaneous protection features).
C. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for all types of moulded case circuit breakers, including solid
state type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. DEFINITIONS
The definitions of terms and symbols used in this Specification are those used in IEC 60947-2.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

Section 16492
Page 1 of 8
B. STANDARDS
Moulded case circuit-breakers solid state type, all MCCB's shall comply with IEC 60947-2 plus any
additional requirements of this Specification.
All MCCB's shall be equipped with solid state release (adjustable for long time and short time and/or
instantaneous protection depends on the selectivity achievements features).
MCCB’s trip units shall be equipped with the Breaker Communications Status Module to perform the
following functions:
 ON/OFF indication.
 Trip indication.
All signals to be transferred to RMU-RTU (as specified in section 16330).
Breakers of 1000A rating and above shall be provided with ground fault protection as per NEC
requirements.
C. GENERAL
Minimum short-circuit capacities of circuit breakers shall be as indicated on the drawings.

All MCCB's connected in one electrical circuit shall be selected to ensure full discrimination up to and
including the prospective short-circuit, and earth fault currents as specified on drawings and Schedules
for prospective earth fault currents the disconnection times shall not exceed 5s.
All MCCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance level for all incoming and outgoing.
All circuit breakers in one electrical circuit shall be fully selective and coordinated, if selectivity
coordination study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to add or change any number of
breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully achieved with no extra cost to the
employer.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. MANUFACTURE
MCCB's shall be manufactured with double insulation of the front face, insulating auxiliary
components from the main power poles thereby allowing as far as reasonable the fitting of auxiliary
units on site without full isolation of the unit.
B. CURRENT RATINGS
Rated currents, rated service short-circuit breaking capacities and trip release settings shall be as
specified in cable installation schedules and on drawings.
Current ratings as specified in the schedules and drawings are for interrupted duty at 220/380V in the
final installed location on site under full load operating conditions of the complete installation, i.e.
taking account of heat produced by other devices and the ambient temperature, physical situation,
enclosure, position and attitude of the MCCB.
The appropriate de-rating factors shall be applied to manufacturer's standard ratings when selecting
MCCB's to meet the specified ratings.

Section 16492
Page 2 of 8
MCCB's shall be suitable for operation in both the horizontal and vertical mounting position without
detrimental effect on operation or rating.
C. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of MCCB. The details shall include
manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing overload and short-circuit discrimination and,
additionally, a full set of overlay transparency discrimination curves or software program to enable
discrimination settings to be checked.
D. TEST CERTIFICATES
Complete certificates shall be provided for each type of MCCB, stating the service and ultimate short-
circuit capacities.
E. CONTACTS
The contact arrangement of current-limiting MCCB's where applicable shall be such that the current-
limiting contacts are in series with the main contacts and remain closed in normal operation, including
time delayed over current tripping.
Contacts shall be arranged so that normal current is carried by low-resistance silver alloy or other non-
welding material while arcing is handled by tungsten contacts.
Multi-set contact MCCB's shall be arranged using one set of contacts for thermal current and other for
arc interruption.
F. TERMINALS
Terminals shall be sized to accommodate the size and type of cable of incoming and outgoing circuits
as specified in the schedules or drawings. MCCB's shall be provided complete with terminal shields.
Terminals shall be arranged for direct connection to busbars, front or rear as required by the
switchboard design.
All poles of multi-pole circuit-breakers shall be constructed so that contacts open, close and trip
simultaneously. It shall not be possible for one or more poles to be closed while another remains open
and vice-versa.
G. OPERATING MECHANISMS
Operating mechanisms shall be over-center, quick-make, quick-break type having operation in which
speed of operation of the breaker is independent of the operator.
Where solenoid operated MCCBs are specified in the schedules or drawings, the operating voltage shall
be as scheduled. Separate solenoids shall be provided for opening and closing operations. Built-in push
buttons shall be provided for local operation.
Indication of the "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" conditions shall be provided not only by the position of
the handle but also by means of a colored band, or line which shall be visible when the circuit-breaker
is on but not when it is off or tripped.

Section 16492
Page 3 of 8
The "TRIPPED" condition shall be indicated by the handle assuming a mid-point position between
"ON" and "OFF" It shall not be possible to manually place the handle in the tripped position.
Indication shall be provided to confirm that all main contacts have separated.
H. ENCLOSURES
Moulded case covers and non-interchangeable trip elements shall be permanently sealed at works to
prevent tampering, but the trip elements may be changed/Adjusted and re-sealed on site by using
suitable tools.
All internal components of MCCB's shall be replaceable on site.
MCCB's shall be certified as satisfying the leakage current testes called for in IEC 60947-2 with
regards to safety isolation.
MCCB's used for motor starting shall satisfy the Type 2 coordination requirements called for in IEC
60947-2.The MCCB and the starter shall preferably be of the same manufacture, and in all cases shall
be tested together and certified as satisfying the co-ordination requirements.
All MCCB's shall be of the same manufacture and those of like kind shall be of the same type. This
requirement applies to loose or individually mounted MCCB's as well as to those incorporated within
assemblies such as control panels, switchboards and distribution boards.
I. PROTECTION MECHANISMS
Each pole shall provide inverse time over current protection and adjustable high set instantaneous
tripping and in accordance to item 2.1 (B) above. All poles shall be tripped simultaneously if one
detects a fault.
Trip units of ratings up to and including 250A shall be built in. Trip units above 250A shall be
replaceable.
Tripping mechanisms shall be selective limiting type to obtain discrimination or by interconnection

with other MCCB trip units.
All adjustable trips shall be visible and adjustable from the front with the breaker in position.
Adjustments to trip settings shall be made to all poles simultaneously by means of a common
adjustment mechanism.
J. OPERATING FACILITIES
Facilities shall be provided for the use of a hand-held tester for on-site testing of all operational
features.
Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earth leakage trips, shunt trips, undervoltage trips and
remote operation shall be provided. These accessories shall all be factory assembled and tested.
Energy based limiting MCCB's which require replacement of the current limiters after operatic shall not
be re-settable until such replacement has been made.
2.3 AUXILIARY CONTACTS

Section 16492
Page 4 of 8
A. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided where specified in the schedule or drawings, auxiliary contacts
shall operate simultaneously with the main breaker contacts.
A. Examine conditions under which residual current devices are to be installed and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all C.B’s should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to ensure
that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
2. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
4. Clean the unit.
5. Operate the circuit breaker to insure smooth operation.
6. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following
methods:
2. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-

wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
7. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units.
2. Electrical Tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter, if

applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the
circuit breaker closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be in accordance
with manufacturer’s published data.
3. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.

Section 16492
Page 5 of 8
4. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential
shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test
duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer’s
recommendation.
5. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests by passing 300 percent rated primary
current through each pole separately.
6. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
7. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection.
8. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection using run-up or pulse method.
9. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
10. Perform minimum pickup voltage test on shunt trip and close coils.
11. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone
interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, and antipump function.
3. Test Values
3. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated
in the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's data is not available, investigate any values
which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Circuit breaker insulation resistance.
5. Control wiring minimum insulation-resistance values should be comparable to previously obtained
6. Trip characteristic of breakers shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic
tolerance band, including adjustment factors. Circuit breakers exceeding specified trip time at 300
percent of pickup shall be tagged defective.
7. Instantaneous pickup values of molded-case circuit breakers shall be within the tolerances.
8. Minimum pickup voltage on shunt trip and close coils should be comparable to previously obtained
2.5 GENERAL INFORMATION
A. The following information shall be provided for each MCCB.
- Voltage and rated insulation voltage.
- Rated current
- Rated operational voltage and rated insulation voltage.
- Number of poles
- Rated service and ultimate short-circuit capacities.
- Method of mounting
- Method of connection
- Protection against external influence
- Current time characteristic curves on log scale.
- The I²t tripping characteristic curves and the peak let-through currents at prospective fault levels,
- Rated short time withstand current

Section 16492
Page 6 of 8
- Rated short-circuit making capacity
2.6 LABELLING
A. On the front of each MCCB a visible label shall be fitted and described as follows:
Labelling shall be marked as follows:
- Rated current and trip setting (for MCCB's with multiple current ratings the maximum value shall be
marked plus, without ambiguity, the value for which the MCCB has been adjusted)
- Rated voltage
- Manufacturer's name or trade mark
- Type designation, catalogue number or serial number
- Rated short-circuit capacity in amperes
- Reference ambient temperature if different from 30 oC
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker, on which the
final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be displayed
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine conditions under which moulded case circuit breakers are to be installed and notify in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all L.V panels should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install moulded case circuit breakers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of moulded case circuit breakers.
A. Prior to energization of moulded case circuit breakers test devices for continuity of circuitry and for
short circuits. Replace malfunctioning breakers with new breakers and then demonstrate compliance
with requirements.

Section 16492
Page 7 of 8

Section 16492
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 16493
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, apply

to work of this section.
D. The requirements of this section apply to residual current devices specified


tests necessary to complete and make residual current device ready for
operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of residual

current devices of the types and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide
residual current devices produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable
Manufacturer in this section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to residual current
devices. Provide Residual current devices which have been UL listed and
labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for residual current devices.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Residual Current Devices

Section 16493
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. This section of the Specification covers residual current devices (RCD's)

intended for protection of final circuits rated at 125A or less. RCD's shall be
installed on circuits as specified in the schedules and single line diagrams.
B. RCD's shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE and with the requirements of the
IEE Wiring Regulations. A residual current-operated circuit-breaker (RCCB)
as described in IEC, DIN/VDE shall come within the scope of RCD as used in
this Specification.
C. When incorporating overcurrent and short circuit trips and used as circuit-
breakers RCD's shall comply also with IEC, DIN/VDE. When used as
disconnectors or switched RCD's shall comply also with IEC, DIN/VDE.
D. Residual current shall be measured by a transformer which may be zero-

sequence-connected or core balance type.
E. RCD's shall have rated tripping currying currents as specified in the

schedules.
F. The Residual operating current should not be greater than 30mA.
G. RCD's shall have the appropriate short-circuit strength for the location in the
system at which they are installed and shall be capable of making, carrying
and breaking the full short-circuit current. This requirement shall apply
whether or not the RCD is the sole or main circuit breaker at that point in the
system.
H. Unless used as circuit-breakers RCD's shall be connected in series with the

overload and short-circuit devices in the system.
I. RCDs shall not be used as the sole means of protection against direct contact.
J. Every RCD shall be provided with a test button and an engraved, clearly
legible label stating "TEST FREQUENTLY"
K. RCD's shall be suitable for loads with high crest factors and shall operate
correctly irrespective of the harmonic or direct current content of the wave
form.
L. RCD's shall not trip out on loss of supply voltage.
M. RCD's shall be provided with auxiliary contacts whenever operation and

controls.

Section 16493
Page 2 of 3
N. The earth leakage circuit breaker shall be combined RCD/MCB 2-poles for
220V and 4-poles for 380V. The Use of RCDO with tails connection shall
obtained the Consent from Engineer.
O. All earth leakage circuit breaker should be rated at service short circuit
entrance level for all incoming and outgoing circuit breakers.
Refer to The Attached Manufacturer's List.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which residual current devices are to be installed

and notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install residual current devices as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable
Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of residual current devices
A. Prior to energization of residual current devices test equipment for continuity

of circuitry and for short circuits. Replace malfunctioning equipment with
new equipment and then demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Section 16493
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 16495
CONTACTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and Division-1 (general requirement), apply to work of this
section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, apply

to work of this section.
D. The requirements of this section apply to contactors specified elsewhere in

these specifications.

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, contactors shall be
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of contactors of

the types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide contactors produced by
a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to contactors. Provide
contactors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for contactors.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Contactors

Section 16495
Page 1 of 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire, 380/220 V, 50

Hz. supplies with number of poles as shown on drawing and fitted with 200 -
250 V a.c. coils, unless otherwise detailed. Contactors shall comply with IEC,
DIN/VDE Standards only contactors which have been type tested to meet the
requirements of the IEC, DIM/VDE Standards BS shall be used.
B. Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class

0.3. The utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may
be used where the load is positively identified as being non-inductive, but
excluding tungsten filament lamps.
D. Only one manufacturers' interlocking relays shall be used on one project.

Relay coils shall be for 200 - 250 V, 50 Hz, unless otherwise detailed
elsewhere.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which contactors are to be installed and notify in

writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install contactors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of contactors.
A. Prior to energization of contactor devices, test devices for continuity of

circuitry and for short circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new units,
and then demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Rev.01 August, 2018 Contactors
Section 16495
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 16496
AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION

(POWER FACTOR CAPACITORS CORRECTION)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Conditions, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this
C. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, apply to work of this section.
necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner,
power factor capacitors correction shall be in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

switchboards of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years as approved by Architect.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and

DIN/VDE, IEC, BS, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI, AND IEEE Standards pertaining
to centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies. Provide centralized
automatic power factor capacitor assemblies and components conforming to one or
more of the foregoing codes and standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies including sizes, enclosures, electrical ratings and characteristics
and wiring diagrams.
Rev.01 August, 2018 Automatic Reactive Power Compensation

(Power Factor Capacitors Correction)
Section 16496
Page 1 of 7
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of
centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies with related low tension,
single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide fully automatic capacitor assemblies for low tension applications as

indicated on the plans and single line diagram.
B. Assemblies shall be fabricated as extensions of the low tension centralized automatic

power factor capacitor assemblies when indicated.
C. Each assembly (unit) shall provide 95% power factor correction with built in sa
feguards to prevent over capacitance.
2.2 RATINGS
A. The voltage rating of the power factor correction equipment shall be 380 volts
between phases.
B. The total KVAR capacity of the assembly units shall be as indicated on drawings.
C. The total KVAR shall be automatically switched in steps of 25/50 KVAR as

indicated on the drawings.
2.3 CAPACITOR CELLS - DRY TYPE
A. Individual capacitors shall be self-healing utilizing polypropylene as a dielectric with

vacuum deposited conductors on the polypropylene as electrodes.
B. Each three phase capacitor shall be furnished with an approved pressure sensitive
interrupter. The interrupter shall disconnect all three phases at the same time to
maintain a balanced circuit.
C. Capacitors shall be contained in hermetically sealed metal cans to prevent

atmospheric contaminants from shortening the useful life.
D. Dielectric material shall be low loss, less than 0.5 watts per KVAR.
E. Dry cells encapsulation medium shall be a thermoplastic material which allows out
gassing to engage the pressure interrupter.

Section 16496
Page 2 of 7
F. Terminal bushings shall withstand 10KV AC to ground and be rated 30 KV BIl or
greater.
G. Nominal design life of individual capacitor cells shall be 20 years.
H. Individual capacitor cells shall be covered by a five year warranty.
I. All capacitor cells shall have threaded terminals for wire connection.
J. To reduce line transients on system no stage shall switch more than 120 KVAR and
no capacitor cell shall exceed 25.0 KVAR.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. All controls shall be mounted on enclosure door for easy inspection and service.
B. A door interlock shall be provided to disconnect control power when enclosure door
is opened.
C. A personnel ground fault breaker shall be provided to disconnect control power upon
accidental contact with control power and earth (ground).
D. Reactive Power Controller/Power Factor Meter
1. Controller shall measure the reactive current on every passage of the voltage
through zero.
2. A LED display shall be provided to indicate the stages that are on.
3. To prevent leading power factor the controller shall be provided with a

programmable target cosine selector.
4. The time delay between switching of capacitors must be field programmable

and have a range of 10 seconds to 10 minutes to reduce hunting and allow
voltage decay as noted in par. 2.7.
5. All output contacts shall be disabled within 15 milliseconds of main power

interruption. The controller shall retain its programming after the restoration of
supply voltage. The controller shall bring the capacitor bank back on line in a
step, phased, normal sequence.
6. Controller shall be able to select 1:1:1, 1:1:2, and 1:2:2 switching sequence of
capacitor steps.
7. Controller shall be able to display power factor with indication for an inductive
or capacitive power factor.

Section 16496
Page 3 of 7
E. On-Off Switch
1. On/Off switch shall control power to all door mounted controls.
2. On/Off switch shall contain pilot light to indicate "on" mode.
F. Blown Fuse Lights
1. Three "Push-To-Test" blown fuse pilot lights, one per phase-door mounted, to
indicate a blown fuse condition.
2. Each fused phase, of each 50 KVAR step, shall have its own blown fuse
indicating light mounted in close proximity to the fuse for easy identification.
2.5 ENCLOSURE
A. The enclosure shall be fabricated from 2.65 mm minimum thick, cold rolled steel.
B. An internal grounding lug shall be provided.

C. A baked enamel finish in matching switchgear grey color shall be used.
D. Capacitor cells shall be accessible for visual inspection and replacement from the
front of the cabinet.
E. Removable lifting eyes shall be provided.
F. The enclosure door shall have a three point latch with key locking handle.
2.6 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. All power wiring shall have a thermoplastic insulation rated for 105 degrees C at 500
volts.
B. System wiring connections shall be made to copper bus bars braced for 65,000 amps
or greater.
C. Contactors shall be rated for switching of reactive current by the contactor

manufacturer.
D. The automatic power factor correction equipment shall be warranted by the

manufacturer of the capacitor cells.
E. Air core transient suppression coils shall be provided in series between the contactors
and capacitor cells.
F. All wiring connections shall be mechanically fixed with nut or screw.

Section 16496
Page 4 of 7
G. The automatic power factor correction shall be an expandable modular design.
2.7 DISCHARGE RESISTORS
A. Capacitor "cells" shall be provided with discharge resistors to reduce residual voltage
to less than 50 volts within one minute of de-energization, unless local codes govern
otherwise.
B. Resistors shall be chosen to insure a 20 year minimum life.
2.8 FUSES
A. To provide for major fault protection, line fuses shall be provided on all three phases
of each switched stage and fixed bank.
B. Line fuses shall be current limiting, U.L., recognized Class T type. Minimum
interrupting ratings shall be 200,000 amps for fuses of 30 amps and above.
C. Fuses shall be designed for capacitor applications and shall be rated not less than
200% capacitor current rating.
2.9 PERFORMANCE FEATURES
A. The capacitor shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 degree C ambient at 1,000
meters and below.
B. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 5% on either the voltage and current wave-
forms shall not effect the life of capacitors, contactors or controllers.
C. A + 10% variation in line voltage shall not effect the life of the capacitor.
D. All capacitors should be rated at 380 volt and can withstand 440 volt.
2.10 SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY
A. Provide in each assembly, space and connection such that if in the future, chokes and
filters will be required, the installation can be accomplished in the field with
minimum down time.
2.11 TESTING
A. All capacitor cells shall be traceable through construction and testing.
B. The automatic capacitor bank shall be tested for proper operation prior to leaving the
factory. The following checks, measurements, and operations must be confirmed and
recorded for each stage.

Section 16496
Page 5 of 7
C. The certified record of these tests shall become part of the permanent documentation
package that travels with the automatic capacitor bank.
- WIRE CONNECTIONS
- TORQUE CONNECTIONS
- PHASE TO PHASE, RESISTANCE CHECKS
- CONTROLLER OPERATION, MANUAL OPERATION
- CONTROLLER OPERATION, AUTOMATIC OPERATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which centralized automatic power factor capacitor

assemblies are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies as indicated in

accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, requirements of applicable
standards, NECA's "Standard of Installation," or equal and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of centralized automatic power

factor capacitor assemblies with other work.
C. Mount the switchboard assembly on flush steel aligning channels elevated above
floor level by a concrete pad and as noted on drawings. Provide aligning shims to
achieve level installation where channels cannot be provided.
D. Insure that centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies are shipped in
sections which can be fitted through the structures and openings available.
E. Bond together the centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies structure,
sections and all conduits terminating at same with a 120 mm² bare copper earth
(ground) cable and connect to the switchboard earth (ground) bus and to the earthing
(grounding) grid as required. Provide conduits terminating at centralized automatic
power factor capacitor assemblies with Earthing (Grounding) Wedges of the required
size.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
equipment connectors.

Section 16496
Page 6 of 7
G. Provide 6.35 mm minimum thick x 60 cm wide insulation mat in front of centralized
automatic power factor capacitor assemblies and rear of free standing equipment and
extend 30 cm beyond ends.
H. Provide protective covering during construction.
I. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
J. Provide control fuses, with five spare fuses for each rating.
K. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized,
test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible,
field-correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise
remove and replace with new equipment and retest.
B. Prior to energization of switchboards and centralized automatic power factor

capacitor assemblies:
1. Perform insulating resistance test on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-

earth for (1) minute. Minimum test voltage to be 1,000 volts D.C. with a
minimum resistance of 100 megohms.
2. Check centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies for continuity and
for short circuits.
3. Notify Architect of any abnormalities.
C. After assemblies are energized, demonstrate functioning in accordance with

manufacturers requirements.
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. All maintenance and inspection on the capacitor assembly shall be done with the
system disconnect device in the open position.
B. Maintenance and inspections should be limited to 15 minutes or less so not to affect

utility billing.
C. An annual inspection of the capacitor cell shall be done to identify failing capacitor
cells (a bulged cover is the symptom to watch for).

Section 16496
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 16500
STREET LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
section.
C. Testing & commissioning section 16950.

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation all lighting fixtures,
drivers, and lamps in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B. The supplier shall submit calculations performed by the latest version of the
DIAlux lighting design software and submitted for all typical lighting
installations of the project for the consultant review and approval.
C. The contractor shall install a mockup from each supplier in the project site for
each type of fittings for the owner and the consultant review and evaluation.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting

fixtures, drivers, and lamps, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with the following standards:
Unless specified otherwise the LED street lighting system shall conform in
design, material, construction and performance to the latest editions of the
IEC/CIE standards, their corresponding British/European (BS EN) or
American (IEEE, ANSI, UL) standards and in particular to the following
publications:
IEC/BS EN 60598-1 Luminaires - Part 1: General requirements and

tests
IEC/BS EN 60598-2-3 Luminaires. Part 2-3: Particular requirements -
Luminaires for road and street lighting
Rev.01 August, 2018 Street Lighting
Section 16500
Page 1 of 18
IEC/BS EN 62504 General lighting - LEDs and LED modules -
Terms and definitions
IEC/BS EN 62717 LED Modules for general lighting –
Performance requirements
IESNA TM-16-05 Technical Memorandum on Light Emitting
Diode (LED) Sources
IESNA TM-21-11 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of
LED Light Sources
IES/IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid- State Lighting Products
IES/IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen
Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
IES/IESNA LM-82-12 Approved Method for Characterization of LED
Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical
and Photometric Properties as a Function of
Temperature
ANSI/NEMA C78.377-2011 American National Standard for Chromaticity
of Solid State Lighting Products.
ANSI/IESNA RP-27.3-07 Recommended Practice for Photobiological
Safety for Lamps - Risk Group Classification
and Labeling
NEMA SSL 3-2010 High-Power White LED Binning for General
Illumination
IEC/BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IEC/BS EN 62262 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
for electrical equipment against external
mechanical impacts (IK code)
IEC/BS EN 62471 Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp
systems
BS EN 55015 Limits and methods of measurement of radio
disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting
and similar equipment
IEC/BS EN 61547 Equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC
immunity requirements
IEC/BS EN 61000-3-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Limits.
Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase)
IEC/BS EN 61000-3-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Limits.
Limitation of voltage changes, voltage
fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage
supply systems, for equipment with rated
current ≤ 16 A per phase
IEEE C62.41.2-2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of
Surges in Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC
Power Circuits
IEC 60068-2-68 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests – Test L :
Dust and Sand
CIE 115-2010 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian
Section 16500
Page 2 of 18
CIE 126-1997 Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow
CIE 140-1997 Road Lighting Calculations
ASTM B117-07a-2011 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray
(Fog) Apparatus
In addition to the above listed standards, the regulations for electrical

installations issued by the local authority, shall also be adhered to.
D. If standards mentioned contradict with this specification, then the

requirements of this specification shall apply.
E. Random samples to be selected from the products provided in the project to be

tested in third party laboratory without extra cost to the owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Compliance sheet with the specification item by item.
B. Fully dimensional drawing of each type of LED luminaire showing

construction details of all parts and details of materials used.
C. Full technical details of the driver including manufacturer, type, catalogue

number, driver efficiency, input watts, max. temperature rise, etc..
Manufacturer’s technical catalogue shall also be submitted.
D. Lighting calculations for luminance and illuminance values and uniformities

using the latest version of DIALux lighting design software for all typical
lighting installations of the project.
E. Test reports from an independent test laboratory that shows total lumens of the
luminaire (absolute photometry) and test report for other electrical tests.
F. LM79 test report for the luminaire with all significant product data and all
performance data including Total Luminous Flux, Luminous Efficacy (lm/W),
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT), Color Rendering Index (CRI), Power
Factor, Wattage, Driver Current, Chromaticity Coordinates and so on.
G. LM80 report from LED vendor for LED used in luminaire with all pertinent
data concerning conditions of testing, ambient conditions, type of equipment,
type of LED source including numbers tested, operating cycle, drive current
for life test, initial luminous flux, lumen maintenance data, failures, etc.
H. LM82 test report for the whole luminaire detailing on the results of
measurement of electrical and photometric properties as a function of
temperature with all significant product data and all performance data
Section 16500
Page 3 of 18
including Input Power/Voltage/Current, Luminous Flux, Luminous Efficacy
(lm/W) at 50oC, Chromaticity Coordinates, Driver Temperature and so on.
I. Factory Pre-release Reliability test reports for the LED (chip, diode or
package) from Joint Electron Devices Engineering Council (JEDEC), or
similar international approved equivalent organization.
J. Report/Certification in accordance with the requirements of IEC/BS EN

62471 for the Photobiological Safety of the luminaire to ensure it is classed
“Risk Group 1”.
K. Thermal management test report, ISTMT UNDER UL 1958 or equivalent with

the same protocol shows clearly soldering point temperature (Tsp) at the
specified driver current and 50oC ambient temperature.
L. EMC test Report shall be provided.
M. 3G Vibration test report in accordance to ANSI C136.31.
N. Test report for Salt Spray (Fog) test performed as per ASTM B117-07a-2011
showing effect on the body of the luminaire and also effect on light output
after this test.
O. Product CB certificate, in addition to UL listing certificate or CE certificate of

conformity.
P. Documentation of the expected useful life time including the testing and
calculation of useful life. And verification of site lighting performance at that
life. If the site defined performance methods are used, the interpolation
between the three sets of LM-80 data.
Q. Operation, instruction and maintenance manual of the system in English

language and in three (3) complete sets.
R. Catalogues and other technical literatures.
S. Other documents, guarantee’s etc., as specified in different clauses of the

specification
T. Unless the above documents are submitted with the offer, the offer will not be
considered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The LED street lighting luminaire shall be fully aesthetic in design and shape,
from a modern concept and a state-of-the-art technology luminaire. The
Section 16500
Page 4 of 18
luminaire shall be manufactured and tested to comply fully with the
requirements of IEC/BS EN 60598-1 and shall be CE or UL certified, or
comply with equivalent international standards with all certification made
available. The luminaire shall have Class-1 insulation in accordance with
above IEC/BS EN with provision of earthing and shall be from American,
European, or Japanese origin.
B. The LED light source and the driver shall be compliant with the Restriction of
Hazardous Substances Directive (ROHS) No. 2002/95/EC as adopted by the
European Union and the luminaire shall be designed for ease of component
replacement and end-of-life disassembly.
C. The luminaire and associated equipment shall be of the proven best quality
and current models, for which replacement parts, like drivers, LED modules,
etc. are and will be available for the normal expected useful life of the fittings
and associated equipment.
D. The construction of the luminaire shall be fully suitable to withstand extreme

temperature and weather conditions as specified (50oC).
E. The luminaire shall have a degree of protection of minimum IP-66 for the
optical compartment and driver or driver compartment in compliance to
IEC/BS EN 60529 against the ingress of dust and moisture under all operating
conditions and shall be suitable for wet location. It shall have a minimum
mechanical strength rating of IK-07. All synthetic materials shall be 100% UV
Stable. The luminaires not having the required degree of protection and
mechanical strength will be rejected.
F. The luminaire body shall be of either extruded aluminium or die cast

aluminium with very low copper-content and high corrosive resistance and
shall be of minimum thickness 2.0 mm. Test report to be provided for the
entire luminaire as an end product for Salt Fog test as per ASTM B-117 for
1000 hours or similar International equivalent standard. Test report will show
effect on the body of the luminaire after this test is performed. The finish
coating for luminaire body shall be with an anti-corrosive anodized/painting
process or equivalent, providing excellent UV and environmental exposure
resistance to fading, peeling cracking or corrosion.
G. The LED luminaire shall be tested for Photobiological safety and shall be of
Risk Group 1 in accordance with the requirements of IEC/BS EN 62471 and
all test reports submitted.
H. All LED’s and controllers should be supplied with the luminaires as per the
manufacturer recommendations.
I. ISTMT reports at 50oC shall be defined separately in case of different fittings

sizes.

Section 16500
Page 5 of 18
J. The supplier shall submit test reports that indicate clearly the life time and
luminaire performance (electrical & photometrical) at the designated ambient
temperature and selected driver current.
K. The LEDS shall be removable/replaceable on site by modular means without

any possible risk to maintaining luminaire photometry and without the need to
demount the fixtures for sake of future upgrading/maintenance requirements.
L. A minimum life time of L85 (10K) 60,000 hrs can be accepted at designated
ambient temperature of 50 ºC in accordance to IES TM-21-11.
M. All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 598-1 and 598-2.
N. All luminaires shall be provided with LED chip compatible with the control
gear used.
O. All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically

spray-painted using acrylic polyester or powders.
P. Non-compatible materials shall not be used in contact with each other.
Q. All LED luminaires shall work at 50ºC ambient temperature, 90% relative
humidity & storage temperature of 80 ºC.
R. The light source should have full cut off angle that emit no light upward.
S. The contractor should stick to the specified lighting fixture manufacturer for
each type of lighting fixture.
T. All tests submitted shall be from test bodies that are ISO 17025 (PT) certified
or accredited NVLAP.
2.2 LED LUMINAIRES
A. The light source shall be high power white light emitting Diodes (LEDs) with
individual efficacy of minimum 140 Lumens/watt arranged modularly to
provide the required lighting output. All lumen figures shall be Deliver (Hot)
Lumens.
The LEDs shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG

C78.377-2011 or similar approved International Standard and shall be from
one of the following approved manufacturers:
1. M/s. Cree, USA

2. M/s. Lumileds, USA
3. M/s. Osram, Germany
4. M/s. Nichia, Tokyo

Section 16500
Page 6 of 18
B. The white LED binning structure must comply in all respects with the
requirements of the NEMA Publication No. SSL 3-2010 "High-Power White
LED Binning for General Illumination” as a minimum or similar approved
international standard and the LEDs shall only be from MacAdam Ellipse Step
1:5 Bins.
C. The LEDs colour temperature shall be 3000K with a colour rendering index of
more than 70.
D. TM-21 reported life time should be run for 10,000 hrs confirming soldering
point temperature (Tsp) used in (coming from Thermal Management Test
report at elevated ambient temperature 50ºC) and selected driver current
(Maximum 500mA).
E. All LED luminaires shall be supplied complete with LEDs controller as per the
manufacturer recommendations.
F. All cables shall be secured within the luminary body to prevent loose lengths
from touching hot surfaces or becoming trapped beneath cover plates. Cable
clips or cleats shall be captive and if secured by adhesive, shall not loosen with
age.
G. Wiring within the fixture shall be 125ºC, 500V and to be as per manufacturer
recommendation.
H. The luminaire shall be fully shielded that emit no light upward.
I. Extreme high power LED, Multi-die LED, COB & Medium power LED are
not accepted.
2.3 LED Drivers Technical Requirements
General:
A. Driver shall be IEC61347-1,-2,-13 and IEC62384 test reported or equivalent

approved international standard.
B. Drivers shall be Restriction of Hazardous Substance (ROHS) Compliant.
C. The Driver and driver output current shall be fully tested and compatible with
the exact LED chips /engine of the luminaire.
D. The maximum driver current allowed is 500mA, 350mA is preferred.
E. Power supplies shall be UL class 1 output or similar European CE or

international approved equivalent.

Section 16500
Page 7 of 18
F. Input Voltage; capable of 120-277 volt, single phase.
G. Drivers shall be IP 66.
H. Surge protection of 10 KV.
I. All drivers shall have protection features (short circuit, overload & thermal
protection).
J. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥ 0.95.
K. Drivers shall comply with BS EN 55015 and IEC/BS EN 61000-3-2, 3-3 with
regard to the RFI and EMC compliances.
L. Drivers shall have a total individual luminaire Harmonic Distortion (THD) of:≤
20% in accordance with IEC/BS EN 61000-3-2 or ANSI C82.77 (2002). The
Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point (LV side of the
distribution substation) after the installation of all the LED fixtures and adopt
harmonic compensation methods to limit the total harmonics distortion in the
supply voltage to maximum 5% as per IEEE 519 Regulations.
2.4 LUMINAIRE EFFICACY:
The LED luminaire system efficacy shall be greater than 100 lumens/watt at 50oC
ambient temperature and 90% relative humidity, driving current 500 mA and CCT:
3000 K.
2.5 OPTICAL CONTROL:
The luminaires shall be fitted with optical refractors & diffusers. Different optics shall
be proposed to exactly suit the specific applications. Independent laboratory photometric
test reports shall be submitted for the luminaire photometric files used in the lighting
calculations. The testing should conform to IESNA LM-79-08 standards.
The cover of the luminaire shall be from clear, high heat and shock resistant, tempered
glass and the optical assembly of the luminaire shall be totally sealed for the degree of
protection specified. The glass cover shall be of adequate thickness encased in stainless
steel or die cast aluminum alloy frame with substantial hinges and catches. Covers made
from acrylic or polycarbonate materials will not be accepted.
The LEDs shall be removable/replaceable by modular means without any possible risk
to maintaining luminaire photometry for future upgrading/maintenance requirements.
2.6 THERMAL MANAGEMENT:
Substantial heavy duty heat sinks shall be provided for mounting the LED modules to
ensure excellent heat dissipation. The design of the heat sinks shall be such that there is
a direct thermal path from the led junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal
Section 16500
Page 8 of 18
transfer effect throughout the life of the luminaire. The heat sinks shall be adequately
designed to enable the luminaires to work efficiently in extreme climatic conditions. The
luminaire shall be provided with a demonstrated ventilation arrangement allowing heat
to be dissipated to the atmosphere. The luminaire shall be designed to prevent collection
of debris on the heat sinks by proven and stated means.
The thermal management test report (ISTMT) should be run at 50oC. The report shall
use thermal camera shots to determine high die temperature and should declare clearly
Tsp values as well as driver current used at designated ambient temperature of 50oC.
(Result must be used on useful life time calculations using TM-21 and LM-80 reports).
The Manufacturer shall provide test certification in accordance with IEC 60068 – 2 68
Part 2 Test L: Dust and Sand and should be submitted by the manufacturer from an
independent / independently certified test laboratory. The test certificate should provide
evidence that the heat increase inside the housing enclosure with dust and sand should
not be more than 10% of the heat inside without the accumulation.
2.7 LIGHTING CALCULATIONS:
The lighting calculations shall be performed by using the latest version of the DIALux
lighting design software and submitted for all typical lighting installations of the project
with the IESNA LM-79 for the luminaire photometric files used in the calculations.
2.8 TYPE TESTS:
Complete type tests shall be carried out and submitted on the LED luminaire as per the
latest IEC/BS EN 60598-1 & 2-3 at an internationally recognized independent test
laboratory (ASTA, DEKRA, CESI, or approved NCB) to be submitted with the CB
certificate.
2.9 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTS:
The manufacturer shall provide all necessary equipment (including all electrical and
illumination test meters) and shall measure and record values of luminance and
illuminance at all predetermined positions. These measurements shall be witnessed by
Site Supervision Engineer, who may require demonstration of the accuracy and
reliability of any instruments used.
2.10 GUARANTEE:
A. Written Warranty from both supplier and agent for ten (10) years for the whole
luminaire starting from commissioning date (warranty includes but not limited to
LEDs Chips, Modules, wiring, driver, connectors, terminal blocks, hardware’s,
Glass, PCBs…etc.) and any luminaire or driver that will fail or mal-function
within this period shall be replaced free of charge.
B. Maintained values (luminance, illuminance, color shift ….etc) shall be

warranted for 5 years from commissioning date with 5% maximum as tolerance.
Section 16500
Page 9 of 18
2.11 SMART POLES
The smart poles are distributed in the new Cairo capital roads as indicated on the
drawings.
Each smart pole shall be manufactured to fit all or some of the following components
that will be supplied by the client as mentioned below, except (lighting fixture, Dali
driver, Dali gateway, Dali controller, …etc) which will be supplied by the contractor,
and all these components to be installed by the smart poles contractor.
The contractor is fully responsible to make all needed coordination between all
manufacturers for the below components:
a. LED lighting fixture complete with Dali Driver. ( supplied by contractor)
b. Controller complete with safety relays (to ensure power cutoff to the billboards
and lighting luminaries). (supplied by contractor)
c. Dali Gateway. (supplied by contractor)
d. CCTV camera.(supplied by client)
e. Digital signage. (supplied by client)
f. Managed Switch & Fiber Optic Converter. (supplied by client)
g. Wi-Fi Access Point. (supplied by client)
h. Evacuation Loud Speakers. (supplied by client)
i. Power Supply. (supplied by client)
j. Public address loud speaker. (supplied by client)
k. Microcell with antenna. (supplied by client)
l. UPS (500W, 2hrs.backup time). (supplied by client)
m. The communication equipment shall be installed in main cabinet (60cm
diameter), IP-67 and shall be equipped with [ventilation fans, access control, door
sensor which shall be activated if the cabinet door is opened without using the
access card and to send alarm signal to CCC and COC buildings] the shape of the
cabinet shall be decorative type as approved by the Arch. Consultant. (supplied by
contractor).
All the components should be designed to withstand extreme weather conditions and
high temperature, and to be installed inside the pole itself or in a weatherproof steel
enclosure attached to the pole.
Install the power cables inside the smart poles in a separate raceway rather than the
raceways used for communication cables.
Smart poles should have the capability to incorporate backhaul for connectivity over
optical fiber.
Smart poles should withstand partial flooding on the ground level.

Section 16500
Page 10 of 18
Smart poles complete with all components shall have minimum life time 15 years,
with 2 years of preventive maintenance.
The contractor shall approve the smart lighting poles from all the concerned
authorities and fulfill all their requirements prior submitting the offer to the consultant
for approval.
The contractor shall submit one sample from the smart pole complete with all
components at the site for final approval from client\consultants before starting the
manufacturing of the rest of the poles.
2.12 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
The lighting control system shall be a state-of-the art computer addressable lighting
management system providing total flexibility of control through addressable control
and monitoring of every street luminaire in New Cairo Capital.
The system forms a structural part of the lighting installation, and the system
architecture is based upon a simple hierarchical network. Although a system may
control many thousands of addressable points, each uniquely identified, monitored
and configurable, the modular network comprises essentially of the following basic
elements:
1. DALI Driver:
The DALI driver is installed in the street lighting fixture itself.
The DALI driver specifications shall be detailed with the lighting fixture
specifications.
2. DALI Controller:
The DALI controller shall be installed in the outdoor lighting panel.
The maximum DALI cable length shall be not exceed 280 meter and to provide
Dali extender (inside the lighting pole) if the length will exceed that limit.
The controller shall be provided with No. of channels equal to the no. of
controlled lighting circuit (as indicated in the drawings) plus two channels as
spears.
The DALI controller specifications shall be as follows:
o It shall be provided with integrated power supply.

o It shall be provided with modular DIN rail which can support from 64 up to
256 DALI ballast.
o It shall be provided with short circuit, surge and overload protection devices.
Section 16500
Page 11 of 18
o Operating ambient temperature from [-25°C to +55°C], [70oC for the Dali
extender].
o Transmission speed: 500 kbps
o Degree of protection shall be not less than [IP-20].
o EAC Approval.
o Ability to have mesh and star network up to 300 mt. in accordance to IEC
62386.
o Permissible humidity to be up to 95% in accordance to DIN EN 61131-2
o Air pressure (operation) 80 KPa – 106 KPa.
o It shall be provided with RJ45 Ethernet ports.
3. DALI Gateway:
The gateway provides a multipurpose Ethernet connection to the lighting control

system.
It supports access to the system via the application software.
It provide web interface delivering access to the inbuilt time check & schedule
editor functions.
The gateway shall have large storage capacity. This saves configuration time &
ensure accuracy for phone & tablet control.
Inbuilt web server — allows the user to check system settings via the network
hardware checker and system roll call tools.
Inbuilt time clock and schedule manager allow the user to manage operation and
task scheduling without advanced technical knowledge.
The gateway shall have the following Features:

o Dual supply option.
o Communications Ports: (One RS-485 DyNet serial port - One 10/100BaseT
Ethernet port).
o Supported Ethernet Protocols: (TCP/IP (TCP, UDP) - HTTP, FTP - IPv4,
IPv6).
o Storage Capacity: (Min. 16 MB for XML file storage - 28 day rolling
network log).
o User Controls: (Service switch - Service LED - Ethernet LED’s status).
o Diagnostic Functions: (Device Online / Offline status).
o RS-485 Port Connections: (Shield, GND, D-, D+, +Ve, AUX - All available
on screw terminals - 1 x 2.5 mm² conductor size - Also available on RJ12
socket).

Section 16500
Page 12 of 18
o Ethernet Port Connections: (Female RJ45 socket).
o Construction: (Low profile DIN-rail polycarbonate (6 unit)).
o Operating Conditions: (Temperature: -5 to 55° C ambient - Humidity: 0 to
90% non-condensing).
o Certification: (CE, C-Tick, UL, FCC, ICES).
4. Main Controller:
The main controller shall be located at the COC (Command Operations Center)
building.
It shall be capable of the following:
o Monitoring all incoming data from the DALI gateways installed in the
lighting poles.
o Providing dimming range from (0% – 100%).
o Providing clear indication of the ON/OFF status of each street lighting
fixture.
All collected data shall be transmitted to a PC central controller.
5. PC Central Controller:
PC central controller shall be equipped with the latest Intel Processor loaded
with the dimming control system software and project graphics; it shall be
supplied as minimum with:
o 21” Flat LED Screen.

o Keyboard and Mouse.
o Latest Intel Processor.
o Integrated RW-DVD Drive.
o Microsoft Windows Operating System.
o Gigabit Ethernet port.
o Internal Modem.
6. Graphical User Interface:
Multi-user Visualization including VPN access, complete software solution

based on state-of-the-art Microsoft Windows technology, for control,
monitoring, documentation and automation tasks, the software shall be based on
the .NET Framework 4.5.2. The Visualization software shall be able to be
configured as a redundant system. Remote access shall be via VPN.
Software clients shall be unlimited and license-free.
The Software shall additionally support Smart Client as an app for iOS,
Android, Windows Phone and Windows RT. Client software for smart devices

Section 16500
Page 13 of 18
shall be available for free download from respective stores free of charge, it shall
support Two viewing modes; Landscape for Graphical View, and Portrait for
List View (Menus), the rotation of the device switches between both modes
automatically.
The software shall have free editor for creating any large and complex projects,
including online simulation mode.
The user interface and menus are multilingual. Any language (culture) can be
used in the interface. The language is switched directly in and at the client at
runtime.
The software shall support the following functions as minimum:
o Providing clear indication of the ON/OFF status for each street lighting
fixture.
o Providing dimming range from (0% – 100%) for each street lighting fixture.
o Fault log manager with recording of messages according to DIN 19235, any
number of messages, including linking of external documents or URLs, with
logbook function and non-changeable storage of the entries in SQL-based
database.
o Presence simulation as ring memory with recording and tag-synchronous
playback.
o Astro time switch for control after sunrise and sunset, with offset channels
and output of the sun position and solar hours.
o Operating hour meter for consumers with 50/50 or 3/3 division to average
wear.
o Self-managed cloud solution based on FTP data transfer, backup of any data
and data volumes.
o File logger for recording any values in csv files.
o Bidirectional IP coupling with third party products.
o JSON / XML Parser for querying data from external sources.
o Calendar as a universal time switch with Outlook-like operation, activation /
deactivation via communication object, date series with adjustable repeat
patterns.
o Plotter with data recording of measured values in SQL-based databases,
without limitation.
o QR code Encoder for the display of coded information.
o Sequencer module for the control of any loads and load groups.
o SIP video door station graphically freely configurable
o Soft PLC can be used as often as required in the project, without limitation
of inputs, outputs and gates, including mathematical functions and
controller, including integrated simulation mode.

Section 16500
Page 14 of 18
o The maximum monitor ensures intelligent distribution of the available power
by intelligent monitoring of the energy reference and avoids expensive load
peaks.
o Start-up call from any PC programs. - Save and retrieve scenarios,
monitoring to correct setting of the end circuits and signaling for local
changes.
7. Managed Switch:
The managed switch shall be supplied by the client. The contractor is fully
responsible to make all needed coordination with the manufacturer.
8. Fiber Optic (FO) Converter:
The FO converter shall be supplied by the client. The contractor is fully

responsible to make all needed coordination with the manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed. Notify in

writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures as indicated, in accordance with lighting fixture

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that installation
complies with requirements and fulfils intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with

other works.
C. Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers, rods,
mounting brackets, supports, bases, cables, canopies, channels, frames, and other
equipment required.
D. Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for the proper,
safe and distortion-free installation in the various surfaces in which they appear.
E. Obtain each lighting fixture packaged with complete instructions and

illustrations showing how to install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance
with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
F. Do not install fixtures and/or parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed

Section 16500
Page 15 of 18
fixtures until all plastering and painting that may mark fixtures finish has been
completed.
G. Support all lighting fixtures independently.
H. Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet

box, utilize a finishing ring to conceal the outlet box.
I. Make splices in internal wiring with approved insulated "wire nut" type
mechanical connectors, suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to
which they are subjected.
J. Use wire suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is
subjected where utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets
and lamp auxiliaries (i.e., wires which do not constitute "through circuit"
wiring).
K. Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed.
L. Install all lighting units set true and free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other
irregularities.
M. Install all lighting units free of dust and dirt.
N. Rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance.
O. Carefully handle to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and provide completely

clean to the Owner at the time of acceptance.
A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building circuitry

has been energized; apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at
the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace
with new units, and proceed with retesting.
C. Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
Design Criteria
All the suppliers shall submit Lighting calculations using the latest version of DIAlux
lighting design software for all typical lighting installations of the project and for each
road based on the following parameters.

Section 16500
Page 16 of 18
A. Calculation parameters
1. All Main roads shall be classified as M2, local roads shall be classified as M3.
2. The lighting poles height shall be as indicated on the plans.
3. The set back of the lighting poles shall be as indicated on the road cross
section.
4. The Bracket projection shall be maximum 1 mt. length and the inclination
shall be 5oC maximum.
5. The spacing between lighting poles shall be as indicated on the plan.
6. The maintenance factor shall be 0.7.
3.4 STREET LIGHTING STANDARD - GENERAL :
A. Standards shall be of hot dip galvanized steel poles as indicated on the drawings.
Foundations shall be of reinforced concrete; either cast in place or pre- cast and shall be
complete with the required anchor bolts, conduits. Anchor bolts shall be set from
template provided by the manufacturer of the lighting pole standard. Standards shall be
equipped with anchor bases and shall be designed to support the associated luminaires
with a reasonable factor of safety under a wind load equivalent to 150 kilometers per
hour. Arms shall accommodate luminaires. Shafts and bracket arms shall be wrapped
with a heavy water resistant paper for protection during shipment and erection.
B. Shaft. The steel shaft of the pole shall be fabricated from not less than 4 millimeter best
grade. The shaft shall have only one (1) longitudinal, automatically, electrically welded
joint and shall have no intermediate horizontal joints nor welds. Only one (1) length of
steel sheet shall be used, which shall be formed into a continuously tapered shaft, having
a taper of approximately 20 millimeters per meter or as supplier recommendation. After
forming and welding the tapered shaft shall be longitudinally cold rolled under sufficient
pressure to flatten the weld and increase the physical characteristics of the shaft so that
the metal will have a minimum. An opening shall be furnished near the top of the shaft
to provide a cable entrance from the shaft into the bracket arm. A special steel adapter
shall be welded into this opening providing a smooth cable guide for wiring and a
support for the attaching plate which is welded to the bracket arm. The pole top of the
shaft shall be secured in place by means of setscrews.
Each pole shall be provided with cable connection box and miniature breaker for
installation in pole with access door. The connection box shall be polycarbonate plastic
enclosure form for through wiring up to (3 x 35 + 25)mm2
C. Slider over base made of die cast Aluminum consists of three parts should be provided
as indicated on the drawings.
D. Bracket arms. The bracket arm assembly shall be as indicated on the drawings and
according to manufacturer standard and coordinated with the luminaries.
E. Concrete base shall be furnished as shown on the drawings.
F. Finish. All material and hardware shall be hot dip galvanized.

Section 16500
Page 17 of 18
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Refer To The Attached Manufacturers' List.

Section 16500
Page 18 of 18
SECTION 16950
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and

Section.
C. Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and

Electrical Systems and related contract drawings, apply to this section of the
work.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment and accessories, required for testing
and commissioning of all systems, equipments and services relating to the electrical
works.
A. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

DIN/VDE, IEC, NEC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards, pertaining to the
testing and commissioning.
B. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit manufacturer's data for testing and commissioning

model No., type, size, range, .... etc.
B. Testing Sheets: Submit a recommended test and commissioning sheets as per IEE
wiring regulations 16th. Edition.
PART 2 - TESTING
2.1 WORKS TESTS
A. The consultant shall inspect and test at the makers' works, during manufacture
and after completion, all or any particular manufactured material, apparatus or
equipment ordered by the contractor for incorporation in the works, in order to
prove that the material, apparatus or equipment meets the requirements of this
Rev.01 August, 2018 Testing And Commissioning

Section 16950
Page 1 of 8
specification. The contractor shall notify the Owner's authorized representative in
advance of all such inspections and tests.
The contractor must arrange on his expenses for works tests to be attended by the
Owner's consultant for all tests specified in different sections of specifications.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's authorized Representative, at the time
of issue, three copies of each and every order for bought in material, apparatus
and equipment intended for incorporation in the works.
Each such order shall clearly state whether the item(s) which it covers is or are
subject to inspection or test before despatch to site.
C. Upon completion of manufacture, or before despatch in the case of stock items,

all material, apparatus and equipment intended for incorporation in the works
shall be subjected, to the tests specified in the relevant National Standard or
elsewhere in this specification together with such additional tests as may be
required in order to prove compliance with this specification. When no relevant
British Standard exists, or the appropriate National Standard fails to specify tests,
the Contractor shall submit his proposals for the tests he requires to provide
compliance with the specification.
D. The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions of
this specification shall be accurately and comprehensively recorded on a form of
test certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure and
countersigned by the contractor and four copies of every such test certificate shall
be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
E. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements the date
and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the
test(s) carried out, the results obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Owner's authorized
Representative is advised in writing whenever material, apparatus or equipment is
ready for inspection or test at his own or his suppliers' premises. At least seven
days notice shall be given, and due allowance shall be made for this period of
notice in drawing up the program of works.
G. In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or equipment

relies upon type tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the suitability of his
product(s), then the Contractor shall arrange for triplicate copies of certificates
giving the results of such type tests to be submitted to the Owner's Authorized
Representative at the time the order is placed.
H. No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be despatched

to site until the Owner's Authorized Representative has had the opportunity to
inspect it or has given written authorization for despatch.

Section 16950
Page 2 of 8
I. No inspection or testing by the Owner's Consultant nor the witnessing of
satisfactory tests nor the authorizing of despatch to site shall in any way relieve
the contractor of any of his obligations under this contract, nor shall it in any way
limit the right of the Owner's authorized representative to reject such items after
delivery to site if they subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or
unsuitable for their intended purpose.
J. When the contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn,
has bought-in major components from a secondary supplier, the Owner's
Consultant shall have the right to elect to inspect such components at the works
of the secondary supplier, and the contractor shall ensure, when placing his
orders, that such rights are secured.
For the purposed of this clause, inter-departmental orders within the same
organization shall be treated in the same manner as orders involving separate
organizations.
K. The Owner's Consultant shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment at
the makers' works. The exercise by the Owner's authorized Representative of this
right shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his obligation to carry out the
prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
L. No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for despatch until it has been
inspected by the Owner's Consultant, or inspection has been waived and despatch
has been authorized.
M. When one or more of the Contractor's purchase orders covers the supply of a
number of like components or items of equipment, the Owner's authorized
representative shall have the right to select that one item or component of each
type and rating be subjected to type tests as described in the relevant National
Standard. Other similar items may then be subjected only to routine tests.
2.2 SITE TESTS
A. The Contractor shall carry out all necessary checks and tests to prove that the
completed installations fully comply with specified requirements.
B. Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section thereof,

the installation, or any substantial section thereof, the installation or that section
and all of the associated electrical equipment shall be subjected to the tests
specified in the relevant National Standards and in the IEE Wiring Regulations,
together with such other tests as may be specified in order to prove compliance
with the Specification.
C. All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance with a
program to be agreed with the Owner's Authorized Representative, and facilities
shall be made available for the Owner's Authorized Representative to be present
at all such checks and tests if he so desires.

Section 16950
Page 3 of 8
D. Tests not carried out in the presence of the Owners' Authorized Representative
shall not be regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the Owner's
Authorized Representative shall not be regarded as valid for the purpose of the
Contract, unless the Owner's Authorized Representative shall have authorized the
Contractor to proceed with the testing process in his absence.
E. Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements, the date
and time of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test
(s) carried out, the result obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F. No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or otherwise

permanently concealed from view instill the Owner's Authorized Representative
has had the opportunity to inspect it, given written authorization for covering to
proceed.
G. No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the Owner's
Authorized Representative or painting has been authorized, unless the final paint
finish is necessary to provide the necessary climate protection.
H. No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations will be recognized as complete

until all of the specified inspections and tests have been satisfactorily carried out.
I. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have the right to waive, at his sole
discretion, the requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus
equipment and installations and the witnessing of tests thereon. The exercise by
the Owner's Authorized Representative of this right shall not in any way relieve
the Contractor of his obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to submit
test certificates.
2.3 CABLE TESTING
A. As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and jointing of the

cables specified herein, or of any usable group of such cables, the Contractor
shall carry out the tests described below, together with such other tests and
measurements to prove compliance with this Specification and with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B. An insulation resistance test, carried out with a 'Megger' insulation tester or other
similar type of testing instrument, to measure the insulation resistance between
each conductor and the remaining conductors and between each conductor and
the metallic sheath, if any, and armouring. The test voltage to be applied shall be
as follows:
Low voltage cables - 500 volts

High voltage cables - not less than 1000 volts
C. The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any voltage tests and the
insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in BS 6346, Table, 6, for all

Section 16950
Page 4 of 8
cables up to 3.3kv. The Contractor shall submit insulation resistance figures for
cables above 3.3kv.
D. A voltage withstand test of 15 minutes duration shall be applied in accordance

with the relevant British Standard, at the test voltage indicated in:
BS 5467, Table 7, of for cables with thermosetting insulation.

BS 5346, Table 5, for PVC insulated cables, or
E. The Contractor shall submit proposals on the appropriate test voltage in respect
of other types of cable.
F. An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable armouring and
metal sheath, if any, have been properly bonded to earth.
G. Phase-rotation, and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that the cables

have been correctly connected.
2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD TESTS
A. Low voltage switchboards shall be thoroughly checked for correct functioning in

every respect and shall be subjected to the following tests:
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power
fuses fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test across the following
points:
(i) Phase to phase

(ii) Phase to neutral
(iii) Phase to earth
(iv) Neutral to earth
The voltage levels and test direction shall be in accordance with the relevant
National Standard for the equipment provided.
This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of

500 V test instrument. With all electronic components and time switches
removed or isolated and with all min isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an
insulation resistance of not less than 20 Megohms shall be obtained between each
of the following points:
(i) Phase to phase

(ii) Phase to neutral
(iii) Phase to earth
(iv) Neutral to earth

Section 16950
Page 5 of 8
2.5 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT EARTHING
A. The Contractor shall inspect and carry out tests on all the system and equipment
earthing provisions in accordance with the requirements of the IEE Wiring
Regulations.
B. The method of test and the selection of suitable test instruments shall conform to
the guidelines given in the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16 th. Edition.
C. These tests shall be carried out on all system and equipment earthing supplied,
installed and connected under this Contract.
D. Where an existing installation has been effectively extended in relation to the

system and equipment earthing provisions supplied under this Contract, the
existing system and equipment earthing shall be inspected and tested for
compliance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.
E. The Contractor shall inspect and re-test the system and equipment earthing
provided under this Contract thirty days prior to the end of the Defects Liability
period. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Authorized Representative seven
days notice of his intent to carry out these tests.
PART 3 - COMMISSIONING
A. Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on completed sections of

the Works, the Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical
installation and leave it in full working order. The term 'Commissioning' shall be deemed
to include:
(i) The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipments which have
previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of being
energize with complete safety.
(ii) The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in
accordance with the directions of the Owner's Authorized Representative or,
failing such directions, in accordance with sound electrical engineering practice.
(iii) The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment.
(iv) The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the
carrying out, where required, of further tests and the making of all necessary
adjustments so as to obtain optimum performance.
B. Compliance with the requirements of this Section of the Specification shall not, by itself,
in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are made correctly, and
that the installations and equipment are in a completely safe and satisfactory condition.

Section 16950
Page 6 of 8
D. All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this
section of the Specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a
competent and experienced commissioning engineer.
E. If considered necessary, the Owner's Authorized Representative will set up a

Commissioning Panel to oversee all activities relating to commissioning of installations,
plant and equipment. The Contractor shall provide appropriate representatives as
members of the Panel to act in an advisory capacity assisting the Owner's Authorized
Representative in all matters relating to the commissioning process.
F. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to appoint and independent
Commissioning Engineer to act on his behalf in the control of all activities relating to the
commissioning process, and in such matters the said Commissioning Engineer shall be
deemed to be and authorized representative of the Owner's Authorized Representative
G. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations and
all work on electrical circuits and equipment which have once been energized are carried
out in a thoroughly safe manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an approved
'permit-to-work' system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an 'authorized
person' as defined in the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations, and shall
communicate the name of such person in writing to the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
H. In appropriate cases the Contractor shall nominate a particular employee as 'Switchgear

Operator' and shall ensure that all switchgear operations are carried out by the nominated
person and that such person is always available for this duty when required.
I. The Contractor shall prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the plant to be
commissioned, the operations to be carried out, the time scale, with exact dates for
specific operations, details of requirements for water and power services, and attendance
or provisions by others. This commissioning schedule, in draft from, shall be submitted
not less than four weeks in advance of the date on which commissioning is to commence.
J. If required by the Owner's Authorized Representative, the Contractor shall present the
information from the commissioning schedule in the form of a flodiagram or a PERT
('Critical Path') chart.
K. The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the electrical

equipment and installations shall be as directed by the Owner's Authorized
Representative or, in the absence of such directions, shall be proposed by the Contractor
and submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative for approval.
L. No connections or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment which has already

been commissioned and set to work, except with the prior consent of the Owner's
Authorized Representative.
M. No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without the prior

agreement of the Owner's Authorized Representative. All applicable test certificates shall
have been first submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.

Section 16950
Page 7 of 8
N. All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner and
in accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at Work etc.
Act, and the Electricity Regulations.
O. Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or, where several items
of equipment are interdependent, the complete plant shall operate continuously and
satisfactorily under normal operating conditions for a period of 72 hours without defect
of any kind. In the event of any defect or mal-operation becoming apparent during this
period the Contractor shall forthwith determine the cause and rectify it by means of
repair, replacement, adjustment or modification and the reliability run shall be re-
commenced. All materials, equipment and labour required to locate and rectify any such
defect shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
P. No plant, equipment or installation will be considered as complete until the prescribed

commissioning procedures have been satisfactorily carried out and the reliability run has
been completed without untoward incident.
Q. The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to require that the hole of the
plant, equipment and installations, or selected parts thereof, be re-inspected and, if
necessary, re-tested immediately before the end of the contractual maintenance period,
and the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the
Owner.

Section 16950
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 16999
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
Division 16000:
16130 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
Metal Conduits & Accessories
1. Allied (U.S.A)
2. Wheatland (U.S.A)
3. Flexicon (U.K)
4. Burn (Thailand)
5. RYMCO (Mexico)
6. Halex (U.S.A)
7. Electric-flex Co. (U.S.A)
P.V.C Conduits & Accessoires.
1. Marshall tufflex (Egypt)
2. Ega tube (Saudi)
3. Decoduct (Dubai)
4. Engineering Home (Egypt)
5. Al-Rehab (Egypt)
Steel Back Boxes
1. Thomas & betts (U.S.A)
2. Steel city (U.S.A)
3. O.Z / Gendey (U.S.A)
16131 CABLE TRAY
1. Novo (Egypt)
2. Technological (Egypt)
Rev.01 August, 2018 List Of Recommended Manufacturers
Section 16999
Page 1 of 6
3. Emeco (Egypt)
4. Elswedy (Egypt)
5. Al tawakol (NTT) (Egypt)
16132 CABLE TRUNKING
1. Novo (Egypt)
2. Technological (Egypt)
3. Elswedy (Egypt)
4. Al tawakol (NTT) (Egypt)
16120 WIRES AND CABLES
1. Energya (Egypt)
2. Egyptian cables co. (ECM) (Egypt)
3. Elswedy (Egypt)
4. GC3 (Egypt)
5. Gulf cable (gc) (Kuwait / Jordan)
6. BICC (Egypt)
Cable Terminations (For M.T. Cables)
1. Raychem (U.S.A)
2. Elastimold (U.S.A)
L.V cables glands
1. CMP (Nickel steel type for multi-core cables and brass nickel type for single core
cable) (U.K)
2. PFLITSCH (Nickel steel type for multi-core cables and brass nickel type for single
core cable) (Germany)
3. Hawke (U.K)

Section 16999
Page 2 of 6
3M for the following :- (U.S.A)
 Lv. Cable terminations.

 Wire nuts.
 Cable marking.
 Lugs.
 Connectors.
 Underground splicing kits for outdoor/landscape lighting network only.
 Cable accessories,….etc.
Manhole Cover & Frame
1. Gatic neenah (U.K)
2. Al Tawakol (NTT) (Egypt)
16140 WIRING DEVICES
Switches & Sockets:
1. Bticino (Italy)
2. Legrand (France)
3. M.K. (U.K)
4. Jung (Germany)
Single Phase Disconnect Switches:
1. MK (logic plus type) (U.K)
2. Legrand (U.K)
3. Eaton (U.K)
16150 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
1. Siemens (Germany)
2. Merlin gerin (France)
3. ABB (Germany)
4. Telemecanique (France)

Section 16999
Page 3 of 6
16170 SAFETY AND MOTOR ISOLATORS (DISCONNECTS)
1. General electric (U.S.A)
2. Eaton (U.S.A)
3. Siemens (U.S.A)
4. Katko (Finland)
5. Socomec (France)
6. Square D (U.S.A)
16270 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1. ABB (Egypt)
2. Tesar (Italy)
3. El-Sewedy (Egypt)
4. Siemens (Germany)
16320 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER KIOSK
1. ABB (Egypt)
2. El-sewedy (Egypt)
16330 PRIMARY/MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND RING MAIN UNITS
1. ABB - Arab (Egypt)
2. Schneider electric (Egypt)
3. Emas (Egypt)
(Provided that all circuit breakers to be imported)
16060 EARTHING SYSTEM
1. Furse (U.K)
2. Erico (by Memphis) (Germany)
3. Wallis (U.K)

Section 16999
Page 4 of 6
16430 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND
16440 DISTRIBUTION BOARD
1. Schneider electrical (Egypt)

2. ABB (Egypt)
3. Legrand (France)
4. GE (Poland)
5. Emas (Egypt)
16290 INSTRUMENTS AND METERING
1. Switchgear and distribution boards manufacturers
16490 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16491 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16492 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SOLID STATE TYPE
16493 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
16495 CONTACTORS
16496 AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION (POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION) ASSEMBLY

Section 16999
Page 5 of 6
16500 LIGHTING
1. Lighting Fixtures :
 General Electric (ERS) (U.S.A)
 LED Roadway Lighting (NXT Series) (Canada)
 Schreder (PIANO) (Portugal)
 Schreder (AMPERA) (Spain)
 Philips (LUMA) (Spain)
 Philips (SPEED STAR) (France)
2. Lighting Poles:
 INCO STEEL (Egypt)
 EL-Sewedy (Egypt)
 El-Babtin (Egypt)
3. Control system:
 Phoenix contact
 Schreder
 Philips
 Osram

Section 16999
Page 6 of 6

العاصمة الإدارية- كود المعدات الكهربائية

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

العاصمة الإدارية- كود المعدات الكهربائية

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rev.01 August, 2018 Table Of Contents

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General

B. In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract

E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the

F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication

G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together

H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate

Rev.01 August, 2018 General Provisions For Electrical Work

K. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and

L. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawing and / or between drawings

1.3 PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

A. The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such

B. The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment,

1.4 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance

1.5 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS

A. Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials

B. Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be

Rev.01 August, 2018 General Provisions For Electrical Work

The contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system

2.1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

EEA - Egyptian Electricity Authority.

DIN - German Standard Institute.

VDE - Association of German Electrical Engineers.

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

NEC - National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).

IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

INETA - International Electrical Testing Association.

NESC - National Electrical Safety Code.

FIA - Factory Insurance Association.

ANSI - American National Standard Institute.

NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association

Rev.01 August, 2018 General Provisions For Electrical Work

"The work" - That part of the project dependent upon or

"The works" - The works referred to in the Specification and

"Directed" - Directed by the Owner's authorized representative

"Inspected" - Inspected by consultant.

"Submitted" or submit - Submitted to or submit to the Owner's authorized

"Specification" - The description of performance requirements,

"IEE Regulations" - The Wiring Regulations for Electrical

2.2 DEFINITION OF "AGREEMENT", ACCEPTANCE" AND “APPROVAL"

"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:

"Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing

"Accepted" or - Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing

"Approved" or - Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing

"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the

i) when given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of

Rev.01 August, 2018 General Provisions For Electrical Work

2.3 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS

B. The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents

E. "Systems" - Includes all necessary equipment, accessories, controls,

2.4 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS

2.5 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not

B. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and/or between drawings

PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS